Printronix P8010 Administrator's Manual
Printronix P8010 is a high-performance cartridge ribbon printer designed for demanding printing applications. It offers fast print speeds, reliable operation, and versatile connectivity options. Its compact design makes it ideal for space-constrained environments, and its user-friendly interface simplifies operation. With its advanced features and robust construction, the Printronix P8010 is an excellent choice for businesses seeking a durable and efficient printing solution.
Advertisement
Advertisement
P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printer
Administrator’s Manual
READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER
Software License Agreement Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND
CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS
PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE
AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU
OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE
REFUNDED.
Definitions.
“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and program. The term “Software Product” includes the
Software resident in the printer and its documentation. The
Software Product is licensed (not sold) to you, and Printronix,
Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product.
License.
1.
Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes.
2.
Restrictions.
a.
To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc., you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence.
b.
You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software
Product.
c.
You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the prior written consent of Printronix, Inc.
d.
You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product.
e.
You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the Software.
f.
You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the
Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use.
3.
Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software
Product and printer.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
1.
THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any time.
2.
IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE
FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF
PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR
MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
3.
Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement.
4.
Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind (including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement.
5.
California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail to comply with the terms of this
License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision
(b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR
52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER
PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR
REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS
AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS
EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY
PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO
ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT.
Administrator’s Manual
P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated, or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic, electronic, mechanical, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
COPYRIGHT 2013 PRINTRONIX, INC.
Trademark Acknowledgements
ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute,
Inc.
Artifex, the Artifex logo , Ghostscript, and the Ghostscript logo are registered trademarks of Artifex Software, Inc.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.
Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation.
EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
IBM, AS/400, and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and Intelligent Printer
Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Printronix, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and IGP are registered trademarks, and
P8005, P8010, P8015, P8205, P8210, P8215, P8220, and SureStak are trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark, and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro
Systems, Inc.
TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.
UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction........................................................... 11
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP) ............... 11
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise ................................... 14
Protocols and Emulations ....................................................................... 15
Graphics Enhancements ........................................................................ 15
Taking Care of Your Printer .................................................................... 15
Conventions in this Manual..................................................................... 15
Warnings and Special Information.......................................................... 16
Contact Information ................................................................................ 17
Printronix Customer Support Center ................................................ 17
Printronix Supplies Department........................................................ 17
Corporate Offices ............................................................................. 18
2 Setting Up The Printer .......................................... 19
Power Requirements .............................................................................. 19
Printer Component Locations ................................................................. 26
3 Operating The Printer ........................................... 27
Control Panel Keys .......................................................................... 29
Cancel a Print Job ............................................................................ 33
Operational Procedures.......................................................................... 34
Reload Paper ................................................................................... 34
Unload Paper ................................................................................... 45
Integrated Print Management System .................................................... 48
Output Darkness .............................................................................. 48
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge .................................................... 49
Lighter or Darker Print ...................................................................... 49
Changing Ribbon Cartridge.............................................................. 50
Table of Contents
4 The Configuration Menus ..................................... 53
Configuration Overview .......................................................................... 53
Main Menu ....................................................................................... 53
Changing Parameter Settings .......................................................... 54
Saving Parameter Settings .............................................................. 54
Default and Custom Configurations ................................................. 54
Navigating the Menus ...................................................................... 55
Top Level Menu Overview ...................................................................... 56
Changing Parameters Example ....................................................... 58
Auto Save Configuration .................................................................. 62
Saving Your New Configuration ....................................................... 63
Optimizing Print Quality.................................................................... 68
Optimizing Print Speed .................................................................... 69
Dynamic Menu Options .......................................................................... 70
P8000 Standard Firmware ............................................................... 73
P8000 TN Firmware ......................................................................... 74
P8000 PCL-II Firmware.................................................................... 75
P8000 LG Firmware ......................................................................... 76
P8000 ANSI Firmware ..................................................................... 77
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware ..................... 78
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware .............................. 79
P8000 Indian and Arabic Language Firmware ....................................... 81
QUICK SETUP Menu ............................................................................. 82
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu .................................................................... 91
HOST INTERFACE Menu ...................................................................... 93
Auto Switching Submenu ................................................................. 94
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu.................................... 96
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ........................................................ 98
Serial Submenu.............................................................................. 100
NETWORK SETUP Menu .................................................................... 105
Ethernet Address ........................................................................... 105
Ethernet Params ............................................................................ 107
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS ................................. 109
EMULATION Menu............................................................................... 111
3270 Params .................................................................................. 112
5250 Params .................................................................................. 119
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language) ................... 124
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB) ........................... 126
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji) .................................. 128
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul) ............................... 132
Table of Contents
P-Series Emulation ........................................................................ 147
P-Series XQ Emulation .................................................................. 153
Serial Matrix Emulation .................................................................. 155
Proprinter XL Emulation ................................................................. 160
Epson FX Emulation ...................................................................... 163
ANSI Emulation .............................................................................. 166
IGP/PGL Emulation ........................................................................ 173
IGP/PGL Submenu ........................................................................ 175
IGP/VGL Emulation ........................................................................ 185
IGP/VGL Submenu ........................................................................ 186
IPDS Emulation .............................................................................. 197
PCL - II Emulation .......................................................................... 202
LG Emulation ................................................................................. 206
Arabic Context Analyzer................................................................. 211
OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation ...................................... 216
Postscript/PDF Interpreter.............................................................. 216
PRINTER CONTROL Menu ................................................................. 221
ADVANCED USER Menu..................................................................... 225
SURE SCAN Submenu .................................................................. 227
DIAGNOSTICS Menu ........................................................................... 243
5 Interfaces............................................................ 249
RS-232 Serial Interface ........................................................................ 251
Centronics Parallel Interface................................................................. 253
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals ............................................. 254
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface................................................................. 255
Compatibility Mode......................................................................... 255
Nibble Mode ................................................................................... 255
Byte Mode ...................................................................................... 255
6 Reprogramming the Security Key....................... 259
Reprogramming the Security Key......................................................... 259
How to Program the Security Key ..................................................259
Table of Contents
7 Downloading Firmware ....................................... 261
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe) .................................................. 262
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 263
Windows Driver Download.................................................................... 265
Automatic Download (.exe)................................................................... 266
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence................................................. 268
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence .............................................. 269
Sending Firmware in Download Mode.................................................. 270
Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR) ........................................... 270
Sending Firmware via USB ............................................................ 270
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter ........................................ 271
Sending Firmware via Parallel ....................................................... 276
Sending Firmware via Serial .......................................................... 277
Downloading Files to the Main File System.......................................... 278
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus .......................................... 278
File Properties Not Shown in Menus .................................................... 279
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 279
PTX_SETUP Download........................................................................ 281
Manual Two-Key Download.................................................................. 281
Downloading Files to the SD Card........................................................ 282
Using TrueType Fonts .......................................................................... 283
Downloading TrueType Fonts ........................................................ 283
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts .............................. 285
8 Troubleshooting .................................................. 289
Cleaning Requirements ........................................................................ 289
Exterior Cleaning............................................................................ 289
Interior Cleaning ............................................................................. 290
Diagnosing Problems............................................................................ 292
Bar Code Verification ..................................................................... 292
Printing a Hex Dump ...................................................................... 293
Most Frequent Problems and Solutions................................................ 295
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors ............................ 296
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order) ..................................... 296
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix) ................................ 316
Table of Contents
A Printer Specifications ......................................... 333
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications ........................................................... 333
HD and H-Series ............................................................................ 333
Printer Weight and Dimensions ............................................................ 335
Environmental Characteristics .............................................................. 335
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)......................................................... 337
Input Voltage (H-Series Models) .................................................... 338
B ASCII Character Set........................................... 341
C SureStak™ Power Stacker ................................ 343
D Zero Tear Pedestal Printer................................. 349
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides .................. 350
Load Paper..................................................................................... 352
Position the Paper Out Sensor....................................................... 354
Set the Tear Bar Distance .............................................................. 355
Set the Top of Form ....................................................................... 356
ZTP SETTINGS Menu .......................................................................... 357
Performance Limitations ....................................................................... 358
E Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC) ........ 361
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC .................................. 363
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer ................. 365
Updating the QCMC Image .................................................................. 367
Erasing the QCMC Image..................................................................... 368
Table of Contents
F PTX_SETUP Commands ................................... 369
The PTX_SETUP Commands .............................................................. 369
General Commands ....................................................................... 370
Line Matrix Commands .................................................................. 377
G Customer Support .............................................. 379
Printronix Customer Support Center..................................................... 379
Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................ 379
H Communication Notices ..................................... 381
Communication Statements.................................................................. 384
Software License Agreement................................................................ 389
1
Introduction
Printer Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions used within this manual.
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers
(CRP)
Printronix
®
has been the global leader in industrial printing solutions for over
30 years, earning a reputation for designing and manufacturing leading edge products and delivering them to market with unsurpassed service and support.
The Printronix P8000™ Line Matrix Printing Platform extends the series of technology innovations that cement Printronix’s leadership position. Line matrix printing is Printronix’s flagship technology, and it remains the workhorse solution for supply-chain and back-office printing applications because of its reliability, lower cost of ownership and flexibility of printing applications.
•
Most reliable printer ever – provides more up time and lower operating costs
•
Cartridge ribbons – deliver darker image, last longer, and costs less to operate than other print technologies
•
Integrated print management system – provides precise control over print quality, print costs, and job planning
•
Tabletop, cabinet, pedestal, enclosed pedestal, or zero tear pedestal
(ZTP) styles – best user access and forms handling flexibility
•
Unsurpassed ease of use – larger graphics LCD simplifies operation and enhances productivity
11
Chapter 1
Printer Overview
Table 1. P8000 Series Models and Configurations
Model Number
LMPPLS
(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal Low Speed)
LMPPHS
(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal High Speed)
LMPCLS
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet Low Speed)
LMPCHS
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet High Speed)
Configuration
P8003H
P8003HZT
P8005
P8005ZT
P8010
P8010ZT
P8006
P8006HZT
P8000HD
P8000HDZT
P8203H
P8205
P8210
P8215
P8220
P8215 (with stacker)
P8220 (with stacker)
P8206H
P8208H
P8200HD
Print Speed
(Lines per Minute)
500
1000
1500
2000
600
600
600
300
1500
2000
600
800
800
300
300
500
500
1000
1000
600
12
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)
Five printer configurations are available:
Tabletop (P80XX or P80XXH)
•
The tabletop models are designed for space constrained environments, allowing for the printer to be placed on a desk or tabletop for quiet use.
•
Paper guides allow for paper input under the table or as a small stack on the table.
•
Output forms are easily accessible from the front of the printer.
•
Using the top paper exit, this printer is ideal for short print runs and easy access to output.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Cabinet (P82XX, P8200HD, or P82XXH)
•
The enclosed cabinet models provide for near silent operation, making these printers perfectly suitable for use in the quietest of office environments.
•
Provides the best paper handling for large print runs. All paper input and output is contained inside the cabinet and protected from bumping and contamination.
•
Highly effective combination of moveable fences and chains allows for precise stacking all the way up to a full box of paper.
•
For tougher forms that tend not to refold well, a SureStak power stacker option is available for the 1500, 2000, H-Series, and OpenPrint HD enclosed cabinet models.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500, 1000, 1500 and 2000 line per minute models
H-Series – 600 and 800 line per minute models
OpenPrint HD (available only for cabinet models)
Pedestal (P80XX, P8000HD, or P80XXH)
•
The pedestal model has a clamshell design that allows easy access to all controls providing faster ribbon replacements and easier paper loading.
•
Oversized casters are standard making movement easy.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
13
Chapter 1
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise
Enclosed Pedestal (P80XX or P80XXH)
•
The enclosed pedestal model has a lower enclosure that holds the input paper while providing for near silent operation.
•
The paper enclosure can accommodate a full paper box (12” maximum length forms).
•
The paper output area is not enclosed for easy access to printed media.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Zero Tear Pedestal (P80XXZT or P80XXHZT)
•
Special push tractor configuration enables printing from the very first to the very last line of a form and then tear-off with no forms lost
•
The elimination of wasted forms between jobs can yield significant savings.
•
An ideal solution for supply-chain and back-office applications.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise
The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise
(PNE). PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current consumable status of all printers. PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on all consumable warnings. When a ribbon reaches the low state, PNE notifies the system administrator remotely via an automated e-mail alert of the low condition. This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches its end of life. If the ribbon is not changed, an alert will again be initiated once the ribbon reaches the 0% end point. Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise
Remote Management Software manual for details.
14
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)
Protocols and Emulations
A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the printer and its host computer. These rules consist of codes that manipulate and print data and allow for machine-to-machine communication. A printer and its host computer must use the same protocol. As used in this manual, protocol and emulation mean the same thing.
Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text, numbers, and punctuation marks. Some characters are defined as control codes.
Control codes instruct the printer to perform specific functions, such as underlining text, printing subscripts, setting page margins, etc. The difference between most printer protocols is the characters used to create control codes and the ways in which these characters are formatted.
When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular printer protocol, it is emulating that printer.
Graphics Enhancements
The IGP/PGL and IGP/VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms, generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and create other graphics.
Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed.
These emulations are available as factory-installed or field-installed options, except on H-series models. For more information, contact your authorized service representative.
Taking Care of Your Printer
Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of.
Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer
supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance. Chapter 8
explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in
Appendix A.
Conventions in this Manual
Control panel keys and indicators are highlighted in UPPERCASE BOLD
PRINT.
Example: Press the CANCEL key, then press the ONLINE key.
Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ONLINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.
Example: “Press
U + V” means press the U (UP) key and the V (DOWN) key at the same time.
15
Chapter 1
Warnings and Special Information
Warnings and Special Information
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you.
CAUTION
A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the printer.
IMPORTANT
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance.
Related Documents
•
Quick Reference Guide — Explains how to set up the printer for basic operation (load ribbon cartridge and media, and clear paper jams).
•
Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.
•
ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and character sets for the ANSI emulation.
•
PCL
®
-II/LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and character sets for the PCL-II emulation.
•
LG Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and character sets for the LG emulation.
•
Character Sets Reference Manual — Information about and examples of the character sets available in line matrix printers.
•
IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.
•
IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used with the optional Code V
TM
emulation enhancement feature.
•
PrintNet Ethernet User's Manual — Information about network protocols, configuration, and operation.
•
IPDS Emulation Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides an overview of Intelligent Printer Data Stream
TM
(IPDS) features, commands, and diagnostics.
•
LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation.
•
LQ-1600K Emulation For The P8000 H-Series Of Line Matrix Printers
Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the
LQ-1600K emulation.
•
KS Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the KS emulation.
•
KSSM Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the KSSM emulation.
•
Arabic Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the Arabic emulation used within the Arabic Language firmware.
16
Printronix Customer Support Center
Contact Information
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•
Model number
•
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
•
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
•
Configuration printout (Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press
ENTER)
•
Network test page if Ethernet is enabled.
•
Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
•
Description of the problem (be specific)
•
Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing of these samples may be required)
Americas (714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114
China (86) 800-999-6836 http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas (800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116 or (65) 6548 4132
China
India
(86) 400-886-5598
(800) 102-7869 http://www.printronix.com/public/supplies/default.aspx
17
Chapter 1
Contact Information
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
18
2
Setting Up The Printer
Before You Begin
Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer. The printer is easy to install. However, for your safety and to protect valuable equipment, perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented.
Power Requirements
The printer must be connected to a power supply outlet that supplies 90 to
264 volts AC at its upper and lower limits. These limits take into account normal voltage sags and surges created on the nominal line voltage by other
AC power loads associated with the AC distribution line. The printer automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage range.
Primary circuit protection is provided by the AC source protection device.
Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines.
IMPORTANT
Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected at 20 amperes maximum for 100 - 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz.
Select a Site
Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements:
•
Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors.
•
For cabinet models, allows at least three feet of clearance behind the printer. (This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides access to the paper stacking area.)
•
For pedestal models, DO NOT place the side of the printer (inlet and exit air vents) against a wall or other object. A minimum of 6 inch spacing is recommended.
•
Has a standard power outlet that supplies 100-135 Volts AC or
178-240 Volts AC power, at 47 to 63 Hz.
•
Is relatively dust-free.
•
Has a temperature range of 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F) and a relative humidity from 15% to 90% non-condensing.
19
Chapter 2
Select a Site
•
Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host computer. This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use,
Table 2. Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length
Interface Type
Centronics Parallel
IEEE 1284 Parallel
Serial RS-232
Maximum Cable Length
5 meters (15 feet)
10 meters (32 feet)
15 meters (50 feet)
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus 5 meters (15 feet)
Twisted Pair / Type 3 300 meters (985 feet)
Ethernet 10/100Base-T 100 meters (328 feet)
20
Printer Dimensions
25.92 in
(65.8 cm) 19.1 in
(73.9 cm)
Figure 1. Tabletop Model
37.73 in
(95.8 cm)
11.36 in
(28.9 cm)
6.1 in
(15.5 cm)
.75 in
(1.9 cm)
21
Chapter 2
Printer Dimensions
57.5 in
(146.1 cm)
41.0 in
(104 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm) 27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
29.0 in
(73.7 cm)
83.0 in
(210.8 cm)
Figure 2. Cabinet Model
22
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
83.0 in
(210.8 cm)
32.5 in
(82.6 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
42.5 in
(107.8 cm)
59.0 in
(149.9 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
32.0 in
(81.3 cm)
Figure 3. Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker
29.5 in.
(74.93 cm)
11.36 in.
(28.9 cm.)
54.0 in.
(137.2 cm)
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(48.5 cm)
29.1 in.
(73.9 cm.)
184564 REV B
Figure 4. Pedestal Model
23
Chapter 2
Printer Dimensions
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(48.5 cm)
38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)
Figure 5. Enclosed Pedestal
54.0 in.
(137.2 cm)
35.9 in.
(91.2 cm)
6.5 in.
(16.5 cm)
24
60.1 in.
(152.7 cm)
42.0 in.
(106.7 cm)
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(43.8 cm)
38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)
31.95 in.
(81.2 cm)
Figure 6. Zero Tear Pedestal Model
25
Chapter 2
Printer Component Locations
Printer Component Locations
Ribbon
Cartridge
Tab (2)
Tractor (2)
Blue Tractor
Lock (2)
Paper Support (2)
Tab Slot (2)
Ribbon
Ribbon
Tension Knob
Splined Shaft
Hammer Bank
Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Vertical
Position Knob
Ribbon Cartridge
Interface
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 7. Printer Component Locations
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
26
3
Operating The Printer
Powering on the Printer
When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. The default power-up state is online. When the self-test completes and the software has initialized successfully, the status indicator light turns on, indicating the printer is online.
The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears in the
LCD display. The ribbon life remaining is shown on the bottom of the LCD display.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the status indicator flashes and a specific fault message appears on the display (such as “LOAD PAPER”). The alarm also sounds if it is configured to do so. See “ LCD Message Troubleshooting
Table” on page 297 for information on fault messages and solutions.
Operating Modes
Online. In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the host. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode.
The status indicator is lit in online mode.
Offline. In offline mode, you can perform operator functions, such as loading paper and setting top-of-form. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer from offline to online mode. The status indicator is off in offline mode.
Menu. In offline mode, pressing ENTER moves the printer into Menu mode.
In this mode, you can navigate through all menus and change the printer configuration. To return to offline mode, press the ONLINE key.
Fault. In fault mode, a condition exists which must be cleared before printing can continue. The status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps (if configured to sound), and a descriptive fault message displays.
The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.
27
Chapter 3
The Control Panel
The Control Panel
Figure 8 shows the keys, displays, and indicators as they appear on the
control panel. The following section provides the descriptions, and functions of the control panel keys.
Key combinations are indicated with the plus (+) sign. For example, “Press
U
+
V” means to press the U key and the V key at the same time.
Cabinet Model
Enter
ONLINE
TOF
VIEW
CONFIG
SELECT
ADVANCE CANCEL
28
Enter
Pedestal Model
ADVANCE VIEW TOF
CANCEL SELECT CONFIG
Legend:
TOF = Set TOF (Top of Form)
VIEW = View/Eject
ADVANCE = Paper Advance
CONFIG = Print Config
SELECT = Load Config/Print Mode
1
CANCEL = Cancel Job
ONLINE = Online/Clear
NOTE:
1
Print Mode only available for H-Series printers.
ONLINE
Figure 8. Control Panel
Control Panel Keys
Control Panel Keys
ONLINE
Toggles the printer between online and offline modes. The key performs the following in Online, Offline, Fault, and Menu modes:
•
Online Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
•
Offline Mode – sets the printer to Online Mode.
•
Fault Mode – causes the printer to recheck the faults; if the faults are cleared, the printer toggles to Offline Mode. If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing the ONLINE key, the fault message reappears.
•
Menu Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
NOTE: When changing to Online Mode, if the user has changed menu items without saving the changes in a configuration, the user will be prompted to save the changes.
ADVANCE
Performs advance to top-of-form, as defined by the current active form length.
The key works both online and offline.
•
If online with data in the printer buffer, the data will print and then the paper will move to the next top-of-form.
•
In the fault state, pressing ADVANCE will advance the paper. The first press moves to the top of the next available form. All subsequent presses advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length.
VIEW
When the printer is online or offline, pressing this key executes the view or eject function, depending on the setting of the menu View Function.
If online with data in the printer buffer, the data prints and the key functions as described below.
If in a fault state, this key will be ignored.
•
View Function — When the View Function menu is set to Enable, pressing the VIEW key for a short time (less than 1/2 second) moves the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in the view state, the message "Printer in View" displays, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. This is done to align the image within a pre-printed form, for example. Refer to the UP and DOWN key functions for additional details on the microstep feature.
Pressing VIEW a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position.
29
Chapter 3
The Control Panel
•
Eject Function — When the VIEW key is pressed and the View Function menu is set to Disable, or when the View Function menu is set to Enable and the VIEW key is pressed for a long time (more than 1/2 second), the bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position as set by the Tear Bar Dist. menu value. The message "READY TO TEAR/EJECT
To Return" displays. While in this position, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. Refer to the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep feature. When the VIEW key is pressed a second time, the printer will move the paper either forward or backward to enable printing on the next available form.
CANCEL
In offline mode, this key cancels all data in the print buffer, if enabled in the
“ADVANCED USER Menu” (see page 225). The print buffer is cleared without
printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top-ofform. If this function is disabled, the CANCEL key will be ignored.
NOTE: 1. Use of this key will cause loss of data.
2. For OpenPrint products, pressing the CANCEL key advances the paper to the next TOF.
TOF
Sets the top-of-form on the printer. This key is active only when the printer is offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition. The paper moves down to the print position and aligns to the top-of-form. Refer to the
User’s Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top-of-form.
NOTE: If there is any data in the buffer, the paper will move to the last print position.
CONFIG
In offline mode, CONFIG prints the current short configuration. This key requires a confirmation with the ENTER key; pressing any other key will exit
from this function. See “The Configuration Menus” on page 53 for an
explanation of configuration menus.
SELECT
In offline mode, this key allows for fast selection of any of the previously stored configurations. Pressing this key causes the printer to cycle through the following configuration load options: Factory, Cfg 1, Cfg 2, Cfg 3,..., Cfg 8.
For H-Series models, this key can be alternatively configured to select Print
Mode.
30
Control Panel Keys
ENTER (
↵
)
When navigating the configuration menus, the Enter key (referenced by the symbol
↵ ) selects the currently displayed option value as the active value. An asterisk (*) appears next to the active value on the display. Enter is also used for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout.
NOTE: The Enter key must be unlocked to execute the select function.
See UP + DOWN, later in this section.
The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than
•
In Offline mode, pressing the Enter key places the printer in Menu mode.
This will bring up a set of icons to select.
•
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), pressing the Enter key moves down into the menu tree of the highlighted icon.
•
Within a menu tree: if the highlighted menu contains submenus instead of a selectable parameter, pressing the Enter key will go into the submenu.
If the highlighted menu is a display only menu, then pressing the Enter key performs no function. If the highlighted menu has selectable parameters, pressing the unlocked Enter key will select the displayed parameter. An asterisk (*) displays next to the selected parameter.
•
If the highlighted menu is an executable menu, pressing the unlocked
Enter key will cause the function associated with the executable menu to run. If the ENTER key is locked, pressing the Enter key for highlighted menus that are executable or contain selectable parameters will cause the message, THE
↵
KEY IS LOCKED, to display momentarily.
NOTE: Press the UP and Down keys at the same time to lock/unlock the
↵
key.
For special Network Address menus or String menus, pressing the Enter key will move down into a special multiple segment setting menu. Exit this menu by pressing Enter again to save changes or Cancel to exit without saving changes. This key is inactive in all other modes.
UP or DOWN (
U
or
V
)
Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes vertical forms adjustment. After pressing VIEW, press
U or V to adjust the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment.
When the printer is in offline mode, press
U or V to move through levels in the configuration menus.
UP + DOWN (
U + V)
Locks and unlocks the ENTER key.
NOTE: The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than
31
Chapter 3
The Control Panel
PREV or NEXT (
Y or Z)
Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu. In the configuration menu, press
Y to scroll backward or press
Z to scroll forward through the menu selections on the same level.
PREV + NEXT (
Y + Z)
When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the printer will reset to the power-up configuration and reset its internal state (in offline mode).
U + ONLINE (IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press
U + ONLINE. If there is data in the printer buffer, the printer will be placed in online mode, print one page, and return to the offline mode. This action can be repeated until the end of a print job. Only one page prints each time you press
U + ONLINE. If there is no data in the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode.
In the fault state,
U + ONLINE does not work.
U + ADVANCE (IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press
U + ADVANCE. The printer will perform a reverse linefeed. If you hold down the
U + ADVANCE keys for longer than
1/2 second, the printer moves to the previous top-of-form position. If there is data in the printer buffer, the data does not print.
In the fault state,
U + ADVANCE does not work.
U + VIEW
(IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press
U + VIEW. If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer, the printer will be placed in online mode, print one line, and return to offline mode.
This action can be repeated until the end of the job. This function prints only one line of text. If the data is not text, only 1/6 inch prints. If there is no data in the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then returns to offline mode.
In the fault state,
U + VIEW does not work.
Ribbon Life Indicator
The bottom of the LCD displays the remaining life of the currently installed ribbon. The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for most applications; no special user setup is needed. If your particular application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing, the ribbon
end point can be adjusted as appropriate. Please refer “Ribbon End Point” on page 90.
32
Cancel a Print Job
Cancel a Print Job
The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your application software. Contact your system administrator for additional information.
1.
If the printer is online, press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode.
2.
From the host system, stop the print job.
NOTE: If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing
CANCEL, the print job continues with data missing when the printer returns to online mode. Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data loss occurrences, as this function deletes unprinted data in the printer. This function is active only in offline mode; the purpose of this function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when print jobs are canceled.
3.
Press CANCEL.
NOTE: You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel.
See “ADVANCED USER Menu” on page 225 for details.
4.
Set the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Reference Guide.
33
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
Operational Procedures
This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to:
• reload paper
• unload paper
Reload Paper
Do this procedure when “LOAD PAPER” displays. (This message occurs when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot.) This procedure reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply, while retaining the current top-of-form setting.
Paper Slot
Tabletop Model
Metal Paper Guide
(2000 lpm only)
Cabinet Model
Paper Slot
184737 REV A
34
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper
Slot
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper Slot
Pedestal Model Enclosed Pedestal Model
Figure 9. Paper Slot Location
Reload Paper
Upper Paper Guide
Wire Guide (2)
Paper Slot
Zero Tear Pedestal Model
Figure 9. Paper Slot Location (continued)
1.
Raise the printer cover. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
(See Figure 7 on page 26 for the location of the lever.)
NOTE: Do not open tractor doors or remove the existing paper.
2.
Tabletop models: place the paper supply on the table underneath the
printer, centered under the paper slot. See Figure 9 on 34.
Cabinet models: open the front door and align the paper supply with the label on the floor.
Pedestal models: place the paper supply on the floor of the printer, centered under the paper slot.
Enclosed pedestal and Zero Tear Pedestal models: open the front door and place the paper supply inside the printer, on the floor of the cabinet.
3.
Ensure the paper pulls freely.
4.
Feed the paper up through the paper slot (see Figure 9). It may be easier
to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first. When this corner can be grasped from the top, rotate the paper back to the normal position.
NOTE: If you are using thick, multi-part forms and are unable to load the new
paper over the existing paper, go to step 15.
5.
Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper slot.
35
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
New Paper
Existing Paper
Figure 10. Loading New Paper into the Printer
6.
Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask, but in front of the
existing paper. See Figure 7 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location.
If necessary, gently press the existing paper back.
7.
Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing paper.
8.
Load the new paper over the existing paper. Open and load the tractors one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping.
NOTE: Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top horizontal perforation of the last page.
36
Reload Paper
Vertical Position
Knob
Paper Thickness
Indicator
A
A
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
Figure 11. Setting the Platen Lever
9.
Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-, and 6-part paper thickness).
NOTE: If you are using the same thickness of paper, there is no need to readjust.
10. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
11. Press ONLINE to remove the “LOAD PAPER” fault message from the display.
12. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
13. Close the printer top cover. Close the cabinet front door.
14. Press ONLINE to place the printer in online mode and resume printing.
37
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
NOTE: Perform steps 15 to 31 only if you are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper.
15. Open both tractor doors.
16. Remove the old paper from the tractors. Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area.
17. Feed the new paper up through the paper slot. Hold the paper to prevent
it from slipping down through the paper slot (see Figure 9 on page 34).
Left Tractor Door
Paper
Left Tractor Lock
F
TOF
TO
Figure 12. Loading Paper on the Left Tractor
19. Load the paper on the left tractor.
20. Close the tractor door.
38
Reload Paper
Tractor
Splined Shaft
Tractor
Tractor Lock
Paper
Paper Scale
Figure 13. Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen, always position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the “1” mark on the paper scale.
21. Normally, you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor.
If adjustment is necessary, unlock the left tractor by placing the tractor lock in the middle position. Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of the number “1” on the paper scale and lock it. (You can also use the paper scale to count columns.)
39
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
Tractor Door
TOF
TO
F
TOF
TO
Tractor Lock
Figure 14. Loading Paper onto the Sprockets
22. Unlock the right tractor.
23. Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door.
If necessary, slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for various paper widths. Then, lock the tractor.
40
Reload Paper
Upper Paper
Guide
Upper Paper
Guide
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper
Slot
Paper Slot
Tabletop Model
Upper Paper
Guide
Metal Paper Guide
(2000 lpm only)
Cabinet Model
Paper Slot
184737 REV A
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper Slot
Upper Paper
Guide
Pedestal Model Enclosed Pedestal Model
184558 REV B
Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper
41
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
Upper Paper Guide
Wire Guide (2)
Paper Slot
Zero Tear Pedestal Model
Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper (continued)
24. Tabletop, Pedestal, or Zero Tear Pedestal models:
Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up, guide the paper over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top cover.
25. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
26. Cabinet models:
Open the cabinet rear door. Make sure the paper is aligned with the label in the output area (inside the cabinet). Close the front and rear doors.
42
Reload Paper
TOF Indicator
Perforation
TOF
TO
Vertical
Position
Knob
TO
TOF
F
Figure 16. Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator
27. Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by rotating the vertical position knob. For best print quality, it is recommended that the top-of-form be set at least one print line or more below the perforation.
NOTE: For exact positioning, press the VIEW key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in View mode “Printer in
View” displays. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper vertically in small increments. Pressing the VIEW key a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position. The key works both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode. (This procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models.)
43
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
Vertical Position
Knob
Paper Thickness
Indicator
A
A
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
183444 REV B
Figure 17. Adjusting the Platen Lever
28. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-, and 6-part paper thickness. Adjust until you have the desired print quality).
NOTE: The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen lever.
29. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
30. Press ONLINE to clear any fault messages (such as “LOAD PAPER”) from the LCD.
31. Press TOF. The top-of-form you have set moves down to the print position. If there is data in the buffer, the paper moves forward to the last print position on the next page.
32. Press ONLINE and close the printer cover.
44
Unload Paper
Unload Paper
1.
Press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer cover.
2.
For cabinet models, open the cabinet rear door. For models with the power stacker installed, press the STACKER UP key on the rear control panel.
Paper
Perforation
TOF
F
TO
TO
F
Figure 18. Unloading the Paper from the Printer
3.
Tear off the paper at the perforation.
4.
Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper stacking area.
5.
For pedestal models, remove the stacked paper from the paper tray.
45
Chapter 3
Operational Procedures
Paper
Power Stacker
Figure 19. Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer
6.
For cabinet models, remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor.
For cabinet models with the power stacker installed, remove the paper from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the stacker mechanism.
7.
Close the cabinet rear door.
46
Unload Paper
Tractor Door
F
TOF
TO
Platen Lever
Figure 20. Completely Removing the Paper
8.
To completely remove the paper from the printer: a.
Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors.
CAUTION
Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path, especially when using a label stock. If you are not careful, labels can detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path, where only an authorized service representative can remove them.
b.
Open the cabinet front door.
c.
Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot. Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area.
d.
Remove the paper from the paper supply area.
47
Chapter 3
Integrated Print Management System
Integrated Print Management System
The P8000 has a feature that automatically monitors and communicates the status of the ribbon life to help the operator know when to change ribbons.
Using an ink delivery system called the Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), the printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded, and all ribbon properties. The ribbon is contained in a plastic box (the cartridge) and feeds only in one direction. The CRS contains an interface board that allows communication between the printer and the cartridge. Using the CRS, the
P8000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and determines the ribbon’s length, ink color, and expected yield. The ribbon life, starting from 100% when new and decreasing to 0% when depleted, is always
displayed on the control panel. See Figure 8 on page 28.
When the ribbon life reaches 2%, a warning message “RIBBON UNDER 2%/
Change RBN soon” appears on the control panel display. The control panel status indicator lamp flashes. The printer will continue printing in this condition until the ribbon life reaches 0% at which time, printing will stop. The ribbon may be changed at any time while the printer is in the “CARTRIDGE AT END
POINT/Change Cart” condition without losing data in the printer’s buffer. If a new ribbon is loaded, the system automatically detects the change, clears the condition when the platen is closed, and restarts the life at 100%. If a partially used ribbon is loaded, the system continues the life at the percentage indicated for the used ribbon.
You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without changing the ribbon by pressing the ONLINE key twice. This may be done as many times as needed to complete the job in progress.
Ribbon usage information is calculated by maintaining a count of impressions
(dots) that is stored on the ribbon cartridge and updated periodically so that the cartridge can be used on a different printer with the information intact. This allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and consumable costs. The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows for efficient planning of print jobs. For example, if the displayed ribbon life were low, you can install a new ribbon before printing a large print job.
Output Darkness
By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements.
However, some applications require that the output remains darker than the nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a lighter final image. The system can easily adjust to this variability. A setting under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the final output. The range is as follows:
Normal (Default)
Darker +1 through +6
Lighter -1 through -10
The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100% and 0%, but if a darker setting is selected, zero will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero.
48
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge
You can take the ribbon cartridge off the printer and reload it at a later time.
The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining capacity.
NOTE: Since the ribbon usage information is stored on the ribbon cartridge, you can reload a partially used cartridge onto a different printer.
Lighter or Darker Print
The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management
System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is as good as it was when the ribbon was new. You may adjust the ribbon end point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs.
See “PRINTER CONTROL Menu” on page 221.
49
Chapter 3
Integrated Print Management System
Changing Ribbon Cartridge
Before changing the ribbon cartridge, determine whether at the end of ribbon life if you want to make the print lighter (extend the ribbon life) or darker
(shorten the ribbon life). If you want to make the print lighter or darker, go to
“Ribbon End Point” on page 90 and follow the procedures for adjusting the
image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, continue with the following steps.
NOTE: Ribbon cartridge instructions and illustrations shown in the following section are for the pedestal model. Follow the same procedures for the cabinet model.
Blue Tractor
Door (2)
F
TO
F
TO
Platen Lever
Figure 21. Preparing to Load the Ribbon
1.
Open the printer cover.
2.
Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
3.
Close the tractor doors.
4.
Remove the old ribbon cartridge and discard properly.
50
Tab (2)
Tab Slot (2)
Changing Ribbon Cartridge
Ribbon
Ribbon
Tension Knob
Ribbon
Cartridge
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 22. Installing the Ribbon Cartridge
5.
Remove the ribbon slack on the new ribbon cartridge by turning the ribbon tension knob clockwise.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ribbon tension knob counterclockwise. This could damage the ribbon cartridge.
6.
Hold the cartridge at an angle, so that the rear side nearest you is lower than the side with the ribbon. Find the two tabs on the outside of the cartridge and place them into the corresponding slots on the air shroud
51
Chapter 3
Integrated Print Management System
Ribbon
Cartridge
A
Hammerbank
Cover
Ribbon Mask
A
Ribbon
Ribbon Tension Knob
Ribbon Cartridge
Figure 23. The Ribbon Cartridge Snapped in Place
7.
Rock the cartridge downward, making sure that the ribbon goes between
the guide and the mask (see Figure 23). You will feel it snap into place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the ribbon does not twist or fold over.
8.
Turn the ribbon tension knob clockwise a few times to make sure the ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
9.
Close the platen lever.
10. Close the printer top cover.
11. Press the ONLINE key twice to return the printer to operation.
52
4
The Configuration Menus
Configuration Overview
To print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of matching the printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to specific tasks, such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper.
The characteristics which define the printer's response to signals and commands received from the host computer are called configuration parameters.
You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer attached to the printer. This chapter provides an introduction to configuring the printer and includes the configuration menus available (depending on which emulation you have installed in the printer).
IMPORTANT
Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the procedures in this chapter.
Main Menu
The Main Menu is organized based on the following firmware types:
1.
P8000 Standard Firmware (IPDS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
2.
P8000 TN Firmware (TN/PGL/VGL/LP+)
3.
P8000 PCL-II Firmware (PCL-II/PGL/VGL/LP+)
4.
P8000 LG Firmware (LG/PGL/VGL/LP+)
5.
P8000 ANSI Firmware (ANSI/PGL/VGL/LP+)
6.
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
7.
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS)
8.
H-Series Firmware (LP+)
9.
Indian Language Firmware (LP+)
10. Arabic Language Firmware (LP+/ANALYZER)
53
Chapter 4
Configuration Overview
Changing Parameter Settings
You may change a printer parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms length, either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer. The control panel allows you to configure the printer’s resident set of configuration menus. An example procedure for using the control panel to change
parameter settings begins on page 58.
When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer, they override control panel settings. For example, if you set the line spacing to 6 lpi with the control panel, and application software later changes this to 8 lpi with a control code, the control code overrides the control panel setting.
Saving Parameter Settings
The parameter settings that you have changed can be permanently stored in
the printer’s memory as a configuration. See “Auto Save Configuration” on
page 62 and “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63.
You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command host control code. See your IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
Default and Custom Configurations
A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings, such as line spacing, forms length, etc. Your printer provides a fixed default configuration and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular print jobs. The factory default configuration can be loaded, but it cannot be altered.
Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements. The
“Save Config.” option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8. An explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom
configuration using the “Save Config.” menu option begins on page 63.
54
Navigating the Menus
Navigating the Menus
To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about navigating through the menus.
You must be Menu mode to navigate the menus.
Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE.
Press ENTER to enter Menu mode. Menus are accessed only in Menu mode.
ONLINE
Scroll up, down, left, or right through the icons to highlight the area of interest.
Press to enter the area of interest. This will take you into that section and list three menu selections, with the middle selection highlighted.
NOTE: For display languages in Korean, Simplified
Chinese, or Traditional Chinese, only one menu selection is shown at a time.
Press to move up or down through the menu selections. The highlighted menu is the active selection.
OR
OR
ENTER
+
Press to scroll through the available choices for the highlighted menu. If the highlighted menu contains submenus, these buttons have no effect and the message “
↵ for Submenu” will display.
Press to confirm selection. For normal menus, this will change or execute the menu. If the selection has submenus, the submenu will be entered.
Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key. The ENTER key is locked by default to prevent you from accidentally changing the printer configuration. The lock and unlock function can be configured to be other than
U + V (See “Set Lock Key” on page 240.)
55
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press to return to the previous menu level.
CANCEL
Press to return to Offline mode. If changes were made, the user will be prompted to save or discard the configuration.
ONLINE
To experiment with navigating the menus, use the example on the next page as a tutorial.
Top Level Menu Overview
When entering Menu mode, the user will see top level menus represented as icons as shown below. Use the navigation buttons up, down, right, and left to highlight the desired icon. As the user navigates, the name of the top level menu displays on the top line of the LCD.
56
Menu Icon
Table 3 provides brief descriptions of first level configuration menu options:
Table 3. Icon Level Menus
Menu
QUICK SETUP
Description
These options allow quick access to the most frequently changed or inputted parameters during the installation of the printer.
PRINTER
CONTROL
This menu allows you to select parameters common to a general user, such as display language and Barcode quality.
ADVANCED USER This menu allows you to select several advanced operating parameters for the printer, such as the speed at which paper will advance when slewing. The SURE
SCAN menu for OpenPrint models is under this menu.
CONFIG. CONTROL These options allow you to save, print, load, delete, name, and reset entire sets of configuration parameters.
Menu Icon
Table 3. Icon Level Menus
Menu
HOST INTERFACE
Description
These options allow you to select either the Serial
RS-232, Centronics
®
parallel, Ethernet
™
, IEEE
®
1284 parallel, or Auto Switching interface for the printer. This menu also allows you to configure several parameters for each interface.
NETWORK SETUP This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address options and Ethernet Parameters options.
EMULATION
DIAGNOSTICS
This menu allows you to configure the options which are available for the current operating (active) emulation. For example, if LinePrinter+ is the active emulation, then the LinePrinter+ emulation options can be configured using this menu. The ACTIVE IGP
EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION menus are under this menu.
This menu includes the diagnostic tests, system memory, software build part number, Feature File
(if one exists), the shuttle type, and statistics of the printer. The Printer Mgmt menu is under this menu.
57
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Changing Parameters Example
OFFLINE
* = Factory Default
QUICK
SETUP
. . .
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Save
Config.
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
Config.
Current Short*
Current Full
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Delete
Config.
All*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Name
Configs
(see Example 2
Reset Cfg
Names
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
All
Auto
Save
Enable*
Disable
A configuration consists of several parameters. The default factory configuration has a starting set of parameters. In the configuration menu above, and in all the configuration menus in this chapter, the factory default values are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default settings. This section provides an example procedure for changing individual parameter values.
58
Changing Parameters Example
The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the
Barcode Quality and Panel Display options. Use these guidelines to navigate the configuration menus and change other parameters.
LCD Notes Step
1.
2.
Press
Make sure the printer is on.
ONLINE
3.
ENTER
Shows the top level icons.
4. Allows you to make configuration changes.
+
5.
6.
UNTIL
ENTER
59
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press Step
7.
LCD
8.
UNTIL
9.
10.
UNTIL
ENTER
11.
UNTIL
12.
13.
UNTIL
ENTER
Notes
The * indicates this choice is active.
The * indicates this choice is active.
60
Step
14.
Press
+
15.
ONLINE
16.
17A.
ONLINE
ENTER
17B.
18. The printer is ready for operation
Changing Parameters Example
LCD Notes
Locks the ENTER key.
Press ENTER to go back into the menus or press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
Configuration changes were detected and you are prompted to save the configuration permanently or temporarily, to cancel changes, or restore the Factory
Configuration.
Saves the Configuration as Config 1 then returns the printer ONLINE.
Places the printer online after permanently saving the configuration changes as
Config 1.
61
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Auto Save Configuration
If the user makes a menu change and attempts to place the printer online without saving the changes to a configuration, the following prompt displays:
The active option is highlighted. Use the Up and Down keys to scroll through the different options; the keys will loop at the top and bottom options. The
↵
(Enter) key selects the highlighted option. After performing the selected option, the printer will go to Online mode.
NOTE: Only the Up, Down, and Enter keys work at the Menu Changes
Detected prompt.
•
Save Permanently (factory default). This option causes the printer to save the configuration to the active configuration and make the active configuration the Power-Up default configuration. If the active configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the configuration to an open configuration and make that open configuration the Power-Up default configuration.
If no open configuration is available, the user must decide which configuration to overwrite. In this case the printer will display the Save
Configuration menu, otherwise, the printer will go Online.
•
Save Temporarily. Menu changes will be implemented, but will not be saved once the printer is powered off.
•
Cancel Changes. This option causes the printer to reload the Active
Configuration, then go Online.
•
Restore Factory. This option will cause the printer to reload the Factory
Configuration, then go Online.
NOTE: A printer fault during the Auto Save process causes the printer to
Save Temporarily.
62
Saving Your New Configuration
Saving Your New Configuration
The Save Config. option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations to meet different print job requirements. Once you have changed all of the necessary parameters, you may save them as a numbered configuration
(Example 1 on page 64) or a named configuration (Example 2 on page 66)
that can be stored and loaded later for future use. If you do not save your configuration using the Auto Save, or this option, all of your parameter changes will be erased when you power off the printer.
Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option, it will not be lost if you power off the printer. You can load a configuration for a specific
print job (see “Load Config.” on page 91). You can also modify and resave it.
You may want to print your configurations (see “Print Config.” on page 91)
and store them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet. If the
Protect Configs. parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing configuration, the new configuration will not be saved until the existing
configuration has been deleted (see “Delete Config.” on page 92).
NOTE: Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.
63
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Example 1
This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered configuration, then later print it.
LCD Notes Step
1.
2.
Press
Make sure the printer is on.
ONLINE
3.
ENTER
4. Allows you to make configuration changes.
+
5.
6.
UNTIL
ENTER
64
LCD
Saving Your New Configuration
Notes Step
7.
Press
8.
9.
UNTIL
ENTER
The * indicates this choice is active.
NOTE:
We recommend that you print the configuration. To print the configuration go to Step 10. To skip this procedure and resume printer operation, go to Step 13.
10.
11.
12.
UNTIL
ENTER
13.
+
Locks the ENTER key.
65
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Step
14.
Press LCD Notes
Press ENTER to go back into the menus or press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
ONLINE
15.
Places the printer ONLINE.
ONLINE
16.
If you printed the configuration, store it in a safe place. The printer is ready for operation.
Example 2
This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration.
Step
1.
2.
3.
Press
Make sure the printer is on.
Follow Steps 2-6 from
UNTIL
4.
ENTER
LCD Notes
5.
66
Step
6.
Press
ENTER
7.
or
8.
9. or
ENTER
10.
CANCEL
11.
12.
UNTIL
UNTIL
LCD
Saving Your New Configuration
Notes
Press the left or right key to choose the character that is highlighted.
Press the up key to select the next character in the string. Press the down key to go back to the previous character and continue editing as necessary.
Configuration 2 is renamed TEST.
67
Chapter 4
Top Level Menu Overview
Step
13.
Press
ENTER
LCD Notes
Your configuration is saved as TEST.
14. Locks the ENTER key.
+
68
15. Press ENTER to go back into the menus or press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
ONLINE
16.
Places the printer ONLINE.
ONLINE
Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed.
Optimizing Print Quality
LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and characters. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed.
To optimize print quality, you can change the values of the following configuration parameters:
•
Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Dark” or “Draft.”
Dark prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. Draft prints at a
faster speed than Dark, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 222
for a written description of Bar Code Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Best” or “High.” Best prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. High prints at a faster
speed than Best, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 175 for
the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and page 182 for a written description
of Print Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “High.” (See page 186 for the
IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and page 190 for a written description of
Print Quality.)
Optimizing Print Speed
OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations
You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper text and barcodes by using the following configuration parameters:
•
Unidirectional (Printer Control menu): Select “Enable” for best quality but reduced throughput (half speed).
•
Resolution (Postscript/PDF menu): Select higher values (horizontal by vertical DPI) to get better print quality.
H-Series Emulations
Print quality varies based on the typeface selected. Both text and barcodes will print using the resolution of the selected typeface.
Optimizing Print Speed
LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed. To optimize print quality instead, you can change values for specific configuration parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed.
If you have optimized the printer for print quality, you can change it to optimize the speed by selecting the values as follows:
•
Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select Draft.
(See page 221 for the Printer Control Menu, and see page 222 for a
written description of Bar Code Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 175 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 182
for a written description of Print Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 186 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 190
for a written description of Print Quality.)
OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations
The printer has been configured at the Factory for optimal print quality through the Resolution configuration parameter (Postscript/PDF menu).
However, users can reduce the horizontal, vertical, or both DPI values of this menu to increase printer speed. The downside of using a lower DPI value is as follows:
•
Print quality is reduced and it can be difficult to read small characters.
•
Barcodes may not get detected and optimized (barcodes are not searched for DPI values less than 120).
Users are encouraged to use the Resolution menu to find the right combination of Print Quality, Barcode Optimization, and Print Speed.
69
Chapter 4
Dynamic Menu Options
H-Series Emulations
The print speed varies based on the typeface selected.
Dynamic Menu Options
The main menus for each of the different firmware types have several footnotes based on the possible options installed with the printer. This includes HOST IO connectivity, various hardware/mechanical options, and software emulations and features. The P8000 products dynamically detect options installed and only include relevant menus for the user to configure.
The following is a description of the types of installation options and their effect on the main menu:
•
HOST INTERFACE: Ethernet related menus are only present when the hardware is installed/enabled.
•
NETWORK SETUP: The NETWORK SETUP menu is only present when
Ethernet is installed.
•
Centronics and IEEE 1284: Options are only selectable or configurable when the optional parallel interface card is present.
•
SureStak Power Stacker: The power stacker and auto elevator options are available for configuration when the SureStak power stacker is installed.
•
QUICK SETUP: This menu is a collection of popular menus to help users quickly configure the printer. It is also affected by the installed options.
70
Active Emulations
The emulations present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and do not require any action from the user.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. H-Series and Indian
Language products only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.
Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
Optional
Emulations
Available
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL
1
ACTIVE
EMULATION
2
EMULATION
3
P8000 Standard
IPDS
PGL/VGL
IGP/PGL*
IGP/VGL
N/A
N/A
IPDS
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IPDS
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
P8000 TN
PGL/VGL
IGP/PGL*
IGP/VGL
N/A
N/A
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
PCL-II
P8000 PCL-II
PGL/VGL N/A
PCL-II*
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
71
Chapter 4
Active Emulations
Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
Optional
Emulations
Available
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL
1
ACTIVE
EMULATION
2
EMULATION
3
P8000 LG
PGL/VGL N/A
LG*
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
44/48XX-
ANSI*
LG
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
44/48XX-ANSI
P8000 ANSI
PGL/VGL N/A
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
Postscript/
PDF*
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/PDF
OpenPrint P8000
Standard
4
PGL/VGL N/A
IGP/VGL &
LP+
N/A
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/PDF
OpenPrint P8000 HD
4
H-Series
Indian Language
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NA
NA
N/A
N/A
LinePrinter+
LinePrinter+
Arabic Language
N/A N/A N/A LinePrinter+
ANALYZER
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
4
The Postscript emulation cannot process color documents. All documents sent to the
OpenPrint printer must be either gray scale or black and white.
72
P8000 Standard Firmware
P8000 Standard Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
4
ZTP WaitTime
4
ZTP TearDist
4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
1
PGL SFCC
3
VGL SFCC
2
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
Ethernet Params
1
1
EMULATION
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
IPDS
2
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL
3
IGP/VGL
2
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
4
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist.
5
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
ADVANCED
USER
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
7
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
6
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
2
3
4
5
If installed.
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Available for pedestal printers only.
6
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
7
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
73
Chapter 4
Active Emulations
P8000 TN Firmware
OFFLINE
74
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
4
ZTP WaitTime
4
ZTP TearDist
4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
1
PGL SFCC
2
VGL SFCC
3
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
3270 Params
5250 Params
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL
2
IGP/VGL
3
PRINTER
CONTROL
ADVANCED
USER
ZTP SETTINGS
4
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
5
Tear Bar Dist.
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
7
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
6
Feature File
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
2
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
4
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
5
Available for pedestal printers only.
6
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
7
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
P8000 PCL-II Firmware
P8000 PCL-II Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
6
ZTP WaitTime
6
ZTP TearDist
6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC
2
VGL SFCC
3
Active Protocol
4
Form Length
4
Form Width
4
Select CPI
4
Select LPI
4
P-Series SFCC
4
Page Length Rep.
5
Max Line Width
5
LPI Adjust
5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+
4
IGP/PGL
2
IGP/VGL
3
PCL-II
5
PRINTER
CONTROL
ADVANCED
USER
ZTP SETTINGS
6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist.
7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
9
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
2
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If PCL-II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Available for pedestal printers only.
8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
75
Chapter 4
Active Emulations
P8000 LG Firmware
OFFLINE
76
QUICK
SETUP
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
6
ZTP WaitTime
6
ZTP TearDist
6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC
2
VGL SFCC
3
Active Protocol
4
Form Length
4
Form Width
4
Select CPI
4
Select LPI
4
P-Series SFCC
4
Vert Forms
5
Horiz Forms
5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Parallel Type
1
IEEE 1284
1
Serial
USB
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist.
7
View Function
Unidirectional
Panel Display
Display Language
ADVANCED
USER
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
Auto Elevator
1
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
9
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
NETWORK
SETUP
1
EMULATION
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
ACTIVE EMULATION
4
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL
2
IGP/VGL
3
LG
5
1
2
3
4
If installed.
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
6
If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
7
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
8
Available for pedestal printers only.
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
P8000 ANSI Firmware
P8000 ANSI Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
6
ZTP WaitTime
6
ZTP TearDist
6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC
2
VGL SFCC
3
Margins
5
Active Protocol
4
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+
4
44/48XX-ANSI
5
IGP/PGL
2
IGP/VGL
3
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist.
7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
ADVANCED
USER
DIAGNOSTICS
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
9
Disp. Intensity
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed
2
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Available for pedestal printers only.
8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
77
Chapter 4
Active Emulations
78
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
6
ZTP WaitTime
6
ZTP TearDist
6
ACTIVE EMULATION
Resolution
5
Paper Size
5
PGL SFCC
2
VGL SFCC
3
Active Protocol
4
Form Length
4
Form Width
4
Select CPI
4
Select LPI
4
P-Series SFCC
4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+
4
IGP/PGL
2
IGP/VGL
3
Postscript/PDF
5
PRINTER
CONTROL
ADVANCED
USER
ZTP SETTINGS
6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
4
Tear Bar Dist.
7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
SURE SCAN
5
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
9
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
2
3
4
If installed
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
6
If Postscript/PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
7
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
8
Available for pedestal printers only.
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP Data Time
2
ZTP Wait Time
2
ZTP Tear Dist
2
Resolution
Paper Size
Ribbon End Point
Load Config.
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
HOST
INTERFACE
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
EMULATION
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
Postscript/PDF
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
2
Ribbon end Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Tear Bar Dist.
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
ADVANCED
USER
SURE SCAN
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
PMD Fault
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
4
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
3
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
2
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
3
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
4
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
79
Chapter 4
H-Series Firmware
H-Series Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP Data Time
5
ZTP Wait Time
5
ZTP TearDistance
5
Graphic Spd Up
Typeface
DBCS CPI
Select LPI
DBCS ASCII Style
DBCS.ASCII Mode
2
Ribbon End Point
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Load Config.
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
LinePrinter+
Printer Protocol
LQ 1600K
2
OKI
4
KS
3
KSSM
3
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
5
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Tear Bar Dist.
6
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
ADVANCED
USER
DIAGNOSTICS
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
1
Power Stacker
1
Auto Elevator
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Job Set/Typeface
Print Hist. Log
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
8
Disp. Intensity
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
7
Feature File
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
2
Availalbe for Hanzi and Kanji LP+ Printers only.
3
8
Available for Hangul LP+ Printers only.
4
Available only when the OKI emulation is enabled. If necessary, refer to the N7000 User's Manual.
5
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
6
Available for pedestal printers only.
7
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
80
P8000 Indian and Arabic Language Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
Active Host
ZTP DataTime
2
ZTP WaitTime
2
ZTP TearDist
2
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Indian Option
6
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Plat @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP
1
Ethernet Address
1
Ethernet Params
1
EMULATION
LinePrinter+
ANALYZER
7
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP SETTINGS
2
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist.
3
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
ADVANCED
USER
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker
1
1
Auto Elevator
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System
1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy
5
Disp. Intensity
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File
4
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If installed.
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Available for pedestal printers only.
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
Available for Indian Firmware only.
Available for Arabic Firmware only.
81
Chapter 4
QUICK SETUP Menu
QUICK SETUP Menu
When the printer is in offline mode, QUICK SETUP is the first Main Menu option that appears on the control panel. The QUICK SETUP menu offers basic menu items required to configure your printer. This section describes the options within the QUICK SETUP menu.
NOTE: The options in your menu will vary depending on the firmware, host
IO, emulations selected, and other features available with your printer.
Active Host
The Active Host menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The Auto Switching option (factory default) allows all ports to be active at the same time.
ZTP DataTime
This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The values range from .5 to 5 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.
ZTP WaitTime
This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to print the next form. The adjustable values range from 500 to 5000 milliseconds in increments of 500 milliseconds. The default value is 2 seconds.
ZTP TearDist
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The up and down arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new value.
DBCS CPI (H-Series)
Defines the default values for horizontal character spacing in DBCS mode.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, and Others
CPI. For the Hangul LP+ printer, selected from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.5, 10, and others CPI.
The factory default for the Hanzi LP+ printer is 6.7 cpi. The factory default for the Hangul LP+ printer is 6.0 cpi. The factory default for the Kanji LP+ printer is 7.5 cpi.
82
DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)
This option specifies the operating mode of the Hanzi printer. If set to DBCS mode, the printer can print double-byte characters and a limited number of single-byte characters. Otherwise, the printer can only print single-byte characters.
Available for the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printers only.
DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)
This option specifies the appearance of the single-byte numeric characters.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from Normal, Oversize and OCRB.
For the Hangul LP+ printer, select from Normal, and OCRB.
If set to Oversize, the numeric characters will appear larger than other single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character "8" will be changed to "
8
". If set to OCRB, the numeric characters will print in OCRB style.
Graphics Spd-Up (H-Series)
This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on
Enhanced/Turbo mode.
•
Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics resolution.
•
Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the speed is faster than Normal mode.
•
Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the printer is faster than Enhanced mode.
•
Match Typeface. The input 180 x 180 dpi graphics resolution will dropdot to the resolution matching the typeface selected.
Typeface (H-Series)
Sets the typeface of the printer. This key requires confirmation with the
ENTER key.
The factory default for the Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS LP+ is Near LQ.
The factory default for the Hangul and Hanzi Big5 LP+ is LQ.
Active Emulation
The Active Emulation menu enables you to select a combination of
emulations as described in Table 4 on page 71.
Active IGP Emulation
The Active IGP Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or
VGL emulation. This menu is only available with the P8000 Standard and TN
firmware as described in Table 4 on page 71.
83
Chapter 4
QUICK SETUP Menu
PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
•
7E (factory default)
•
1 – FF
VGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
•
5E (factory default)
•
1 – FF
Active Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.
Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width.
Select CPI
This parameter allows you to specify the characters per inch (cpi) values.
The options are 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0. The factory default is
10.0 CPI. Also, 6.0 CPI is available for Indian Language firmware.
Select LPI
This parameter allows you to specify the lines per inch (lpi) values.
•
ASCII: The options are 6.0, 8.0, 9.0 and 10.3 LPI. The factory default is
6.0 LPI.
•
Indian Language: All ASCII options are available with additional options
3.0, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 LPI.
•
H-Series: The options are 6.0 or 8.0 LPI. The factory default for the Hanzi and Hangul LP+ is 6.0. The factory default for Kanji LP+ is 8.0.
84
P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•
SOH (hex 01) (factory default)
•
ESC (hex 1B)
•
ETX (hex 03)
•
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E) – also called caret (^)
•
TILDE (hex 7E) – (~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur.
Margins
•
Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•
Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•
Top Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down.
•
Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width.
85
Chapter 4
QUICK SETUP Menu
Vert Forms (LG)
•
Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.
•
Top Mrg 6/0 This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other.
Horiz Forms (LG)
•
Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other.
•
Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The default value is 13.2. Press NEXT to increase the value, PREV to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other.
Page Length Rep (PCL-II)
•
Inches/Page (factory default). Allows the user to set the page length in inches.
•
Lines/Page. Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines.
Max Line Width (PCL-II)
Set the maximum line width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the printer.
LPI Adjust (PCL-II)
Set the lines per inch value for the PCL-II emulation.
86
Resolution (OpenPrint)
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard:
•
120x144 DPI (factory default)
•
90 x 96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD:
•
180x180 DPI (factory default)
•
180x90 DPI
•
90x180 DPI
•
120x120 DPI
•
90x90 DPI
Paper Size (OpenPrint)
This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. Available options include:
•
Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
•
Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
•
Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1 inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6 to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8 to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper, select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches” menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration printout will also show the length menu used.
87
Chapter 4
QUICK SETUP Menu
•
See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.
Table 5. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
A3
A4
A5
A6
US Fanfold
Letter
Legal
Executive
Fanfold 10x14in
Tabloid 11x17in
Fanfold 12x12in
JIS B5
US Folio
No. 10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
C6 Envelope
ISO B5
Actual Size
13.6 x 11 in
8.5 x 11 in
8.5 x 14 in
7.3 x 10.5 in
11.7 x 16.5 in
8.3 x 11 2/3 in
5.8 x 8.3 in
4.1 x 5.8 in
10 x 14 in
11 x 17 in
12 x 12 in
7.2 x 10.1 in
8.5 x 13 in
4.1 x 9.5 in
4.3 x 8.7 in
6.4 x 9 in
4.5 x 6.4 in
6.9 x 9.8 in
Indian Option (Indian Language)
•
Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page, and Data Page.
•
Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without composing.
•
Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for non-table format.
•
Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for tableformatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.
88
•
Tall ASCII Font. The available options include enable and disable.
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12, and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
•
Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 6 shows the space width adjustment
value according to its typeface and CPI setting.
Table 6. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on
Indian Language Printers
Typeface
Data Processing
Near Letter Quality
CPI
15
17.1
20
6
6
10
12
13.3
10
12
13.3
15
17.1
Space Width
6
30
8
7
20
12
10
9
18
15
13
12
10
•
Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi numerals.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.
89
Chapter 4
QUICK SETUP Menu
Ribbon End Point
This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%.
Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Save Config
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.
Power Up Config
This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or
1-8) will be the power-up configuration.
Open Platen @ BOF
Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter, you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between perforations
Slow Paper Slew
•
Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum speed.
•
Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that certain forms will stack neatly.
90
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu
The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
* = Factory Default
Load
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Save
Config.
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
Config.
Delete
Config.
Current Short*
Current Full
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
All*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Name
Configs
(see Example
Reset Cfg
Names
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
All
Auto Save
Enable*
Disable
Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.
Print Config.
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral.
91
Chapter 4
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu
Delete Config.
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory default configuration cannot be deleted.
Power-Up Config.
You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the power-up configuration.
Protect Configs.
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When disabled (factory default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First” displays.
Name Configs
This option allows you to rename any of the eight different configurations.
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config. menus. The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
See example 2 on page 66 on how to name configurations.
Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number.
Auto Save
•
Enable (factory default). When a change has been made to a Config. menu, this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the change to a Config #.
If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change, pressing ENTER saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a menu change is made, pressing ENTER will save the change to Config 1.
•
Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.
92
HOST INTERFACE Menu
HOST
INTERFACE
* = Factory Default
1
2
3
If installed.
Used by LG firmware instead of Centronics and IEEE 1284.
Default for Indian Language firmware.
Active
Host
Auto Switching
Centronics
1
Serial
IEEE 1284
1
Ethernet
3
USB
Parallel
2
Auto
Switching
Parallel
Type
2
Centronics*
IEEE 1284
Centronics
1
Serial IEEE 1284
1
USB
The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface parameters which can be configured.
IMPORTANT
When set to Auto Switching, the printer will load the power-up configuration and the new interface parameters. Any settings made and not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost.
93
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Auto Switching Submenu
Auto Switching
* = Factory Default
1
If Installed.
Parallel
Hotport
1
Port Type
Centronics
IEEE 1284*
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Serial
Hotport
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
USB
Hotport
Timeout
10 sec.*
10 - 60 sec
Ethernet
Hotport
1
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Switch Out On
Data Timeout
Session Close
Auto Switching gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to the serial, parallel, USB, and Ethernet ports as if they were the only interface connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received. The user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Port Type
Select the parallel interface type connected to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection, you would select
Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu.
94
Auto Switching Submenu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in order to service the other ports.
Report Status
•
Disable (factory default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports the fault to the host.
•
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port.
Switch Out On
NOTE: This option is only available under Ethernet Hotport.
•
Data Timeout (factory default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has been received for the selected Time Out period.
•
Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed. If the Ethernet option is not installed the Network Socket is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.
95
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu
IEEE 1284
* = Factory Default
1
OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended range to 256 with a default of 64.
2
Not available on LG or PCL-2 products.
Prime
Signal
Enable*
Disable
TOF
Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
1
16*
1-16
Auto
Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Trickle
Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Offline
Process
2
Disable*
Enable
The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and supports bidirectional communication. Configuration of this interface is
controlled from the host. Refer to “IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface” on page 255
for more details about the available modes (Compatibility, Nibble, and Byte).
Prime Signal
•
Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
•
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284 parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.
96
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu
Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty.
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast.
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not process parallel data while offline.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not print) the current parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer's buffer is full.
97
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
Centronics
* = Factory Default
1
OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended range to 256 with a default of 64.
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
PI Ignored
Enable*
Disable
Data
Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Resp.
Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Busy On
Strobe
Enable*
Disable
Latch
Data On
Leading*
Trailing
Prime
Signal
Enable*
Disable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
1
16*
(1-16)
Auto
Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Trickle
Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Data Bit 8
•
Enable (factory default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.
•
Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero, regardless of its actual setting.
PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
•
Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes.
•
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true.
Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer.
•
Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.
•
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.
98
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
Resp. Polarity
The Resp. Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer.
•
Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
•
Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
Busy On Strobe
•
Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.
•
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
Latch Data On
Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal. The default is leading.
Prime Signal
•
Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
•
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.
Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out.
99
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast.
Serial Submenu
Serial
Data
Protocol
XON/XOFF*
ETX/ACK
ACK/NAK
Series1 1 Char
Series1 2 Char
ENQ/ACK
DTR
Baud
Rate
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud*
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57600 Baud
115200 Baud
8*
7
Word
Length 8
* = Factory Default
1
OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.
H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 with a default setting of 64.
1*
2
Stop
Bits 1
Parity
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
Data Term
Ready
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
Request to
Send
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
True
Buffer Size in K
1
16*
1-16
Poll
Character
00 Hex*
(00-FF Hex)
Poll
Response
0 ms*
(0-30 ms)
Idle
Response
Disable*
Enable
One Char
Enquiry
Disable*
Enable
Framing
Errors
Disable
Enable*
Offline
Process
Disable*
Enable
100
Serial Submenu
Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements.
•
XON / XOFF (factory default). The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off. In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received. When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON).
The data does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a nonblock protocol.
•
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.
•
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device did not receive the transmission.
•
SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.
Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll
Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.
101
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
The response characters are described in Table 7.
Table 7. Series1 1 Char Response Characters
Printer State
Online and Buffer Empty
Online and Buffer Full
Offline and Buffer Empty
Offline and Buffer Full
Response
CR
3
0
2
•
SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the
Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The
response characters are described in Table 8.
Table 8. Series1 2 Char Response Characters
Printer State
Online and Buffer Empty
Online and Buffer Full
Offline and Buffer Empty
Offline and Buffer Full
Response
1 CR
3 CR
0 CR
2 CR
•
ENQ/ACK. Enquiry/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of data by sending an ENQ (Enquiry, decimal 5, Control-E) approximately every 80 characters. When the printer is ready for more data, it replies with an ACK
(Acknowledge, decimal 6, Control-F).
•
DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.)
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The choices for the RS-232 interface are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud. The default is 9600 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may also want to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance.
102
Serial Submenu
Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer.
Stop Bits 1
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer.
Parity
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.
Data Term Ready
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data.
•
True (factory default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
•
On Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
On Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
•
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
Request To Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
On Line and BNF (factory default). Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
On Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
•
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
•
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
103
Chapter 4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: 1. If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may want to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance.
2. H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.
Poll Character
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF hexadecimal.
Poll Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response. It may be configured from 0 through 30.
Idle Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. The printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size.
One Char Enquiry
The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature.
Table 9. One Char Enquiry Response Characters
Printer State
Online and Buffer Not Full
Online and Buffer Full
Offline and Buffer Not Full
Offline and Buffer Full
Response (hex)
22
23
20
21
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled.
104
Framing Errors
Possible errors that can occur when the printer’s serial interface settings do not match those of the host computer.
•
Enable (factory default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message will display on the control panel.
•
Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the control panel.
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not process serial data while in offline mode.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without printing the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer’s buffer is full.
NETWORK SETUP Menu
NETWORK
SETUP
Ethernet
Address
1
Ethernet
Params
1
See section below.
1
Only if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed.
Ethernet Address
Ethernet
Address
* = Factory Default
IP Address Subnet
Mask
Gateway
Address
MAC
Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
hhhhhhhhhhhh
IP
Assignment
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
BootP
Disable*
Enable
105
Chapter 4
NETWORK SETUP Menu
IP Address
A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN.
Subnet Mask
A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets.
Gateway Address
A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation.
MAC Address
This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only.
IP Assignment
This menu provides two options to control IP Assignment: DHCP and BootP.
•
DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable and Enable (factory default).
•
BootP. You can enable/disable the BootP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable (factory default) and Enable.
106
Ethernet Params
Ethernet Params
Ethernet
Params
* = Factory Default
1
If installed.
ASCII
Data Port
9100*
1025 - 65535
IPDS Data
Port
1
5001*
1025 - 65535
Keep Alive
Timer
3 Minutes*
0- 10 Minutes
Ethernet
Speed
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
Job Control
Standard*
Enhanced
Fast Standard
Off
Offline
Process
Disable*
Enable
The Ethernet Params menu helps your printer communicate on a network.
For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet
Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual.
ASCII Data Port
This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting.
•
9100 (factory default)
•
1025 - 65535
IPDS Data Port
This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the
IPDS option is installed.
•
5001 (factory default)
•
1025 - 65535
Keep Alive Timer
This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated.
•
3 Minutes (factory default)
•
0 - 10 Minutes
107
Chapter 4
NETWORK SETUP Menu
Ethernet Speed
This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card
(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.
•
Auto Select. (factory default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half
Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•
10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•
100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
Job Control
The job control mode has four options:
•
Standard (factory default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is completely received by the NIC.
•
Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is fully printed.
•
Off. No job synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
•
Fast Standard. The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged immediately. Use this selection if the job is timed out due to a delay in the acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data being printed.
NOTE: It is recommended to set this option to Enhanced if the emulation is
Postscript.
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not network data while in offline mode.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without printing the current network job while the printer is offline until the printer’s buffer is full.
108
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS
The emulation types present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and do not require any action from the user.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. The H-Series and Indian
Language printers only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.
This ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION function allows you to activate the desired emulation. There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual for details).
When changing from one emulation to the other, the printer will load the power-up configuration and the new emulation parameters. Any configuration settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in
NVRAM will be lost.
Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL
1
ACTIVE
EMULATION
2
EMULATION
3
P8000 Standard
IGP/PGL*
IGP/VGL
N/A
N/A
IPDS
IPG/PGL
LinePrinter+
IPDS
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
P8000 TN
IGP/PGL*
IGP/VGL
N/A
N/A
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
109
Chapter 4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS
Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL
1
ACTIVE
EMULATION
2
PCL-II*
IGP/PGL & LP+
P8000 PCL-II
N/A
IGP/VGL & LP+
P8000 LG
P8000 ANSI
OpenPrint P8000
Standard
OpenPrint P8000 HD
H-Series
Indian Language
Arabic Language
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
LG*
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL & LP+
44/48XX-ANSI*
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL & LP+
Postscript/PDF*
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL & LP+
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
EMULATION
3
PCL-II
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
LG
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
44/48XX-ANSI
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/PDF
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/PDF
LinePrinter+
LinePrinter+
LinePrinter+
ANALYZER
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
110
EMULATION Menu
The EMULATION menu allows you to configure the emulation used with your printer. The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ, and Serial
Matrix emulations are all part of ASCII LinePrinter+. The H-Series
LinePrinter+ has a unique set of emulations such as LQ1600K, KS, and
KSSM depending on the firmware type. You can configure options for the active emulation via the EMULATION menu. Emulation options are further described in their corresponding Programmer's Reference Manual.
The menus shown for the ASCII LinePrinter+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL are specific to the Standard, ANSI, and TN firmware. These emulations may be structured differently for the PCL-II and LG Firmware. For PCL-II and
LG Firmware, some of the character sets or options may not be available.
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
1
Optional Emulation
2
OpenPrint firmware only.
3270
Params
1
5250
Params
1
LinePrinter+
44/48XX-
ANSI
1
IGP/PGL
1
IGP/VGL
1
IPDS
1
PCL-II
1
LG
1
Postscript/
2
111
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
112
3270 Params
3270
Params
1
Char Set
Select
* = Factory Default
1
This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed.
Translation
Tbl
Active Char
Set
Secondary Sets*
Primary Sets
Prt Partial
Line
Enable*
Disable
Early Print
Cmpl
Disable*
Enable
PTX
Transparent
Lead-in Chars
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2
¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Change
Case
Dual Case*
Mono Case
Set Text
Orientn
Left to Right*
Right to Left
Intervention
Req
Send To Host*
Do Not Send
Compatibility
Op
CR At MPP + 1
On*
Off
NL At MPP + 1
On*
Off
Position Aft FF
On
Off*
Last Char = FF
On*
Off
Null Suppression
Off*
On
FF Validity
Off*
On
Auto Skip At End
Off*
On
FF After Job
Off*
On
CR, EM, & NL
On*
Off
Host
Override
Disable*
Enable
Format
Control
Disable*
Enable
Max. Print
Width
13.2 inches*
Printer Width
3270
Params
Char Set Select
Primary Sets
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0285 English UK
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0287 Danish Alt
0278 Finnish
0288 Finn. Alt
0297 French
0500 Internat 5
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0289 Span. Alt
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0803 Hebrew Old
0424 Hebrew
0892 ORC A
0893 ORC B
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
0875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Katak
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0905 Turk. Old
0256 Intern. 1
0924 Euro Lat-9
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
Secondary Sets
English US*
English UK
Austrian/German
German (Alt)
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Danish (Alt)
Finnish/Swedish
Finnish (Alt)
French
International
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Portug. (Alt)
Spanish
Spanish (Alt)
Spanish Speak.
Swiss Fren/Ger
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Turkish Old
Latin 2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
3270 Params
* = Factory Default
113
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the Coax interface’s current character set. This operation is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface.
Active Char Set
Specifies which character language set will be the active set.
•
Secondary Sets (factory default)
•
Primary Sets
Prt Partial Line
•
Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
•
Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.
Early Print Cmpl
Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data. Early Print Complete is only available if the IPDS feature is installed.
•
Disable (factory default). Means the printer will suppress the Early Print
Complete response until all printing is complete.
•
Enable. Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data.
NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, the data in the printer will remain in the buffer (regardless of the setting of the Cancel Buffer option). It is recommended that local procedures be followed to recover from the error.
Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress. If this is done you will need to restart the printer.
PTX Transparent
Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN3270 emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets are available:
•
Set 1. start code: <% (factory default) stop code: >
•
Set 2. start code:
¬¬ stop code: $
•
Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _
•
User Defined.
114
3270 Params
Usr Defined HTRN
This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option:
•
Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
•
Start Code 2 5F
•
Stop Code 5B
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
Change Case
Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-
SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi.
SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by the host computer.
•
Dual Case (factory default)
•
Mono Case
Set Text Orientn
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right.
•
Left to Right (factory default).
•
Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.
Intervention Req
Select from the following:
•
Send To Host (factory default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer when any of the following occur:
•
Printer faults occur.
•
Hold mode time–out occurs.
•
Not Send To Host
If not selected, the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause data loss (paper jam, ribbon stall, online platen open, etc.).
115
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Compatibility Op
The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.
CR At MPP+1
MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.
•
On (factory default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line.
•
Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.
NL At MPP+1
Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.
•
On (factory default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position.
•
Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.
Position Aft FF (4234 only)
Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent.
•
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form.
•
Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form.
Last Char = FF
Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer.
•
On (factory default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form.
•
Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.
NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.
If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer, the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option.
Null Suppression
•
Off (factory default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.
•
On. Treats nulls as blank spaces.
116
3270 Params
FF Validity
Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.
•
Off (factory default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space.
•
On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream.
Auto Skip At End
Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.
•
Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line.
•
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form.
FF After Job
Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print screen function).
•
Off (factory default). Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return command was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line.
•
On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form.
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only)
CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes.
•
On (factory default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control codes.
•
Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces.
117
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host, or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
•
Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option.
•
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.
Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed.
•
Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
•
Enable.
Max. Print Width
Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated.
•
13.2 inches (factory default)
•
Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)
118
5250 Params
5250 Params
5250
Params
1
Char Set
Select
* = Factory Default
1
This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed.
Translation
Tbl
Active Char
Set
Secondary Set*
Primary Set
Prt Partial
Line
Enable*
Disable
PTX
Transparent
Lead-in Chars
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2
¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Graphic
Chek Err
Enable*
Disable
Graphic
Chek Cod
60*
40-FE
Set Text
Orientn
Left to Right*
Right to Left
Host
Override
Disable*
Enable
Format
Control
Disable*
Enable
Max. Print
Width
13.2 inches*
Printer Width
119
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
120
5250
Params
Char Set Select
Primary Sets
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0278 Finnish
0297 French
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0285 English UK
0892 OCR A
0893 OCR B
0424 Hebrew
0803 Hebrew Old
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
0875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0256 Intern. 1
1112 Balt Mult
0924 Euro Lat-9
1122 Estonian
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
0500 Internat 5
Secondary Sets
English US*
Austrian/German
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Finnish/Swedish
French
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English UK
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Latin 2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
Multinational
* = Factory Default
5250 Params
Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface’s current character set. This operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface.
Active Char Set
Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.
•
Secondary Set (factory default)
•
Primary Set
Prt Partial Line
•
Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
•
Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.
PTX Transparent
Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN5250 emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets are available:
•
Set 1. start code: <% (factory default) stop code: >
•
Set 2. start code:
¬¬ stop code: $
•
Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _
•
User Defined.
Usr Defined HTRN
This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option:
•
Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
•
Start Code 2 5F
•
Stop Code 5B
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
121
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Graphic Chek Err
Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action) command.
•
Enable (factory default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected.
•
Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.
Graphic Chek Cod
Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40 through FE. The character becomes the printer default when:
•
The printer is powered off and then powered on.
•
An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.
•
The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.
The value can be the following:
•
60 (factory default)
•
40 – F4
Set Text Orientn
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right.
•
Left to Right (factory default)
•
Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.
Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host, or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
•
Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option.
•
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.
122
5250 Params
Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as earlier generation line matrix printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed.
•
Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
•
Enable.
Max. Print Width
Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using an IBM host interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated.
•
13.2 Inches (factory default)
•
Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)
123
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)
* = Factory Default
1
Indian Language Firmware
EMULATION
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
6.0 CPI
1
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
3.0 LPI
1
4.0 LPI
1
4.5 LPI
1
5.0 LPI
1
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
9.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
P/S Mode CPI
Changed*
Unchanged
Host
Command
Enable*
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir.
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
Indian
Option
1
Indian Formatter
Tall ASCII Font
Space Width Adjust
Hindi Numeral
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up config
Current config
Factory config
Set
Substitution
Inactive*
Active
Barcode x-offset
Disable*
Enable
Print Char.
Barcode
Height
Disable*
Enable
Set
124
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)
Printer
Protocol
* = Factory Default
1
Hidden when IPDS is active.
2
Indian Language Firmware
3
Arabic Language Firmware
Active
Protocol
P-Series*
P-Series XQ
Serial Matrix
Proprinter XL
Epson FX
P-Series P-Series
XQ
Serial
Matrix
Proprinter
XL
Epson
FX
(see page 147) (see page 153) (see page 155) (see page 160) (see page 163)
Font Attributes
Typeface
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
NLQ Sans Serif
High Speed 100
NLQ 200
DP 200
High Speed 64
BARCODE 145
BARCODE 160
DP 144
High Speed 144
NLQ Naskhi bold
NLQ Kofi
3
NLQ Kofi bold
3
NLQ Hadeeth
3
NLQ Req’a
3
NLQ Haydar
3
NLQ Asri
3
3
Page Format
Prop.
Spacing
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Disable*
Enable
Italic Print Slashed
Zero
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Disable*
Enable
Text
Position
Top of Line*
Bottom of Line
ASCII
Compatible
2
Disable*
Enable
Form
Length
Abs. Length IN
1
11.0* inches
(0.1-24)
Abs. Length MM
1
279.4* mm
(0.1-609.6)
Funct. of Lines
66* lines
(1-192)
Form
Width
Abs. Width IN
1
13.6* inches
(0.1-13.6)
Abs. Width MM
1
345.4* mm
(0.1-345.4)
Function of CPI
136
* characters
(1-272)
Margins
Left Margin
1
0* columns
(0-369)
Right Margin
1
0* columns
(0-369)
Bottom Margin
0* lines
(0-451)
Perforation
Skip
1
Disable*
1/2 Inch
2/3 Inch
5/6 Inch
1 inch
125
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB)
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
LQ-1600K
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI*
7.5 CPI
Others CPI
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Font
Attributes
Typeface
LQ
Near LQ*
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
SONG*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Font Scale
Standard*
16 x 24
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Graphics
Spd Up
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
Page
Format
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
126
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi Big5)
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
LQ-1600K
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI*
7.5 CPI
Others CPI
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Font
Attributes
Typeface
LQ*
Near LQ
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
MING*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Graphics
Spd Up
Normal
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface*
Page
Format
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable
Power up Config.
Current Config.*
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal
As Space*
As Square
127
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji)
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
LQ-1600K
Select CPI
10.0 CPI
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI*
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI
8.0 LPI*
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI
7.5 CPI*
Others CPI
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Font
Attributes
Typeface
LQ
Near LQ*
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
Mincho*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Graphics
Spd Up
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
Page
Format
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
128
LQ-1600K Emulation
Printer
Protocol
LQ-1600K
(from pages
* = Factory Default
1
For Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS only
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
Printer
Select
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Disable*
Enable
Character Set
Standard Sets*
Epson Set*
ASCII (USA*)
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
IBM PC
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Alt Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Currency
Sign
1
RMB Select*
$ Select
AR3240
Compat.
1
Disable*
Enable
129
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson
®
emulation.
130
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Currency Sign (for GB and Kanji)
•
RMB Select (factory default). The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a RMB
“¥” character in DBCS mode. Default for GB.
•
$ Select. The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a dollar “$” character in
DBCS mode. Default for Kanji.
AR3240 (for GB and Kanji)
•
Disable (factory default). AR3240 emulation does not take effect. Default.
•
Enable. AR3240 takes effect, SUB (0x1A) is used as another SFCC. The listed commands will take effect and turn the extending table character on.
131
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
1
Hangul KSSM only.
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
KS*
KSSM
Select CPI
1
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI*
6.7 CPI
7.5 CPI
8.5 CPI
9.0 CPI
10.0 CPI
Others CPI
Host
Command
Enable*
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir
Ignore Pg. Fmt
Font
Attributes
Typeface
LQ*
Near LQ
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
Myungjo*
Gothic
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
1
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
OCRB
Normal Thin
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
1
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Graphics
Spd Up
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
Page
Format
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
132
KS Emulation
Printer
Protocol
KS
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
CR Bold Select
Enable*
Disable
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Printer Select
Disable*
Enable
Alt Set 80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Emulation
Extend
Disable*
Enable
Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
•
Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together with the text before CR.
•
Disable. Normal CR function.
133
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Emulation Extend
•
Disable (factory default). Does not select the extension command.
•
Enable. Selects the extension command (ESC 4/ESC 5 to select/cancel
Italic Printing and ESC SP to select Intercharacter Spacing).
134
KSSM Emulation
Printer
Protocol
KSSM
Character
Sets
Standard Sets*
IBM PC*
Epson Set
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
CR Bold
Select
Enable*
Disable
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Printer Select
Disable*
Enable
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Alt. Set 80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Character Sets
This parameter selects a character set for the KSSM emulation.
CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
•
Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together with the text before CR.
•
Disable. Normal CR function.
Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
135
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 cpi font will compress to 20 cpi.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
136
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Page Format
Form
Length
Abs. Length IN
11.0* inches
08.5** inches
(0.1-24)
Abs. Length MM
279.4* mm
215.9** mm
(0.1-609.6)
Funct. of Lines
66* Lines
68** Lines
(1-192)
* = Factory Default for Hanzi and Hangul printer
** = Factory Default for Kanji printer
Form
Width
Abs. Width IN
13.6* inches
(0.1-13.6)
Abs. Width MM
345.4* mm
(0.1-345.5)
Funct. of CPI
136* Characters
204** Characters
(1-272)
Margins
Left Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Right Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Bottom Margin
0* lines
(0-451)
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
1/2 inch
2/3 inch
5/6 inch
1 inch
Printer Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information with ASCII products.
For H-Series Hanzi GB, Hanzi Big5, or Kanji LP+ printers, refer to the
LQ-1600K Programmer’s Reference Manual for details. For the H-Series
Hangul LP+ printer, refer to the KS or KSSM Programmer’s Reference
Manual for details.
CPI/LPI Select
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) values.
Host Command
This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being acknowledged by the printer.
•
Enable (factory default). All host commands are acknowledged by the printer.
•
Ignore All. All host commands are ignored by the printer.
•
Ignore CPI. All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.
•
Ignore LPI. All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.
•
Ignore Unidir. All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.
•
Ignore Pg. Fmt. All page format commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer. This is applicable for H-Series Hangul LP+ printers only.
137
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Font Attributes
Typeface (ASCII)
NOTE: Not all firmware types have the entire list of typefaces.
•
Data Processing (factory default). A general purpose font printing out at
120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary with each cpi. For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets must be selected for Indian characters to print.
•
NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically. This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi.
For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets must be selected for Indian characters to print.
•
OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
•
High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
•
NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
•
High Speed 100. A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and
48 dpi vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
NLQ 200. This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
DP 200. This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
High Speed 64. This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to
10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
BARCODE 145. This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
BARCODE 160. This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 13 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
Typeface (Arabic Language)
NOTE: These Arabic typefaces appear at the end of the list above for the
Arabic Language firmware only. They are only used when the Arabic
Analyzer is enabled.
•
NLQ Naskhi bold
•
NLQ Kofi
•
NLQ Kofi bold
•
NLQ Hadeeth
•
NLQ Req’a
•
NLQ Haydar
•
NLQ Asri
138
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Typeface (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to select the typeface for printing in the emulation.
•
LQ. Default value for Hanzi Big5/Hangul.
•
Near LQ. Default value for Hanzi GB/Kanji printer.
•
Normal
•
Hi-Speed
•
Super Hi-Speed
•
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Typeface (H-Series)
•
SONG. Only for Hanzi GB printer.
•
MING. Only for Hanzi Big5 printer.
•
Mincho. Only for Kanji printer.
•
Myungjo, Gothic. Only for Hangul printer. Myungjo is the default value.
Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character. This menu only works in ASCII mode and is not available for the H-Series Hangul product.
•
Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column in the printed text will line up.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents, which gives text a typeset appearance.
Bold Print
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
•
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
139
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Italic Print
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
•
Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
•
Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
•
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)
•
DBCS Mode (factory default). The printer is in DBCS mode. It can print double-byte characters as well as a limited number of single-byte characters.
•
ASCII Mode. The printer is in ASCII mode. It can only print single-byte characters.
DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the single-byte alphanumeric characters in DBCS mode.
•
Normal (factory default).
•
Oversize. The alphanumeric characters will appear larger than normal single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character “8” will be changed to “8”.
•
OCRB. The alphanumeric characters will print in OCRB style. It only takes effect on LQ typeface for Hanzi/Kanji printer.
•
Normal Thin. The alphanumeric characters will be slightly thinner compared with Normal style. This is only applicable for Hangul printer.
140
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Text Position
Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to
Top-of-Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to
Bottom-of-Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi line space. The following example shows both Top-of-Line and Bottom-of-Line text positions:
Dot
Row
Top of Linespace
5
6
7
8
Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace
9
10
3
4
1
2
11
Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace 12
1
Text Position
Top-of-Line
Text Position
Bottom-of-Line
ASCII Compatible
Allows you to specify ASCII characters print position alignment. This option affects device font characters only, and does not affect graphics or barcodes.
•
Disable (factory default). The ASCII characters print position aligns
(horizontally) with Indian characters.
•
Enable. The ASCII characters print position shifts up to align
(horizontally) with standard ASCII characters.
If Indian character sets, such as Hindi, Kannada, Gujarati or Tamil are selected, the menu will automatically switch to Disable. Enable will not be available for selection until non-Indian character sets are selected.
If the “Tall ASCII Font” option is available, the menu automatically switches to
Disable. Enable will not be available for selection until the Tall ASCII Font is disabled.
Compressed Mode (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS characters in ASCII mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. Prints out ASCII mode ASCII characters and half-width DBCS characters.
141
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
DBCS Compressed (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS characters in DBCS mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. Both the DBCS and ASCII characters will be printed as half-width of their original size.
Font Scale (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the font size. It is applicable for the H-Series GB printer.
•
Standard (factory default). The character prints as 24 x 24 cell size.
•
16 x 24. The character prints as 16 x 24 cell size.
Encoding (H-Series)
•
Address Table (factory default). Specifies the address table supported.
GB18030 is for Hanzi GB printer.
BIG5 (factory default), CNS, TCA, ETEN, IBM5550, TELETEXT,
BIG5+, BIG5E, and HKSCS are for Hanzi Big5 printer.
KSC5601 is for Hangul printer.
Shift-JIS is for Kanji printer.
•
UTF-8. The printer takes in UTF-8 data stream and prints out according to
Unicode format.
Taller 15 CPI (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII characters as
15 CPI in ASCII mode.
•
Disable (factory default). The characters in 15 CPI appear shorter than other CPIs such as 10 CPI.
•
Enable. The height of 15 CPI characters is the same as other CPIs such as 10 CPI.
Horizontal Expnd (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify dot character horizontal expansion for both ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.
Vertical Expnd (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify dot character vertical expansion for both
ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.
142
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Graphics Spd Up (H-Series)
This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on the Enhanced/Turbo mode.
•
Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics resolution.
•
Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the speed is faster than Normal mode.
•
Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the speed is faster than Enhanced mode.
•
Match Typeface. The input 180x180 dpi graphics resolution will drop-dot to the resolution which matches the typeface selected.
Page Format
Form Length
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form length only displays as a function of lines.
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width.
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form width only displays as a function of characters.
Margins
•
Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•
Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•
Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Perforation Skip
•
Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
•
1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, 1 inch. You may set up a skip-over margin of
1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1 inch. For example, a skip-over margin of
1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page.
143
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Print Char. Set
When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current character set is printed.
Indian Option
•
Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page, and Data Page.
•
Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without composing.
•
Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for non-table format.
•
Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for tableformatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.
•
Tall ASCII Font. The available options include Enable and Disable.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12, and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
•
Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 11 on page 145 shows the space width
adjustment value according to its typeface and CPI setting.
144
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Table 11. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on
Indian Language Printers
Typeface
Data Processing
Near Letter Quality
CPI
15
17.1
20
6
6
10
12
13.3
10
12
13.3
15
17.1
Space Width
6
30
8
7
20
12
10
9
18
15
13
12
10
•
Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi numerals.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration is loaded.
•
Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
145
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Set Substitution
When this option is activated, the character set overlay in RAM is activated.
This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX. In either case, a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active. If the power-up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both enabled, the character set overlay is automatically activated at power-up or during a soft reset. See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.
Barcode x-offset
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not set to the origin.
Barcode Height
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. If Barcode x-offset is enabled, the barcode height follows P5000 legacy barcode behavior.
Error Handling (H-Series)
This command determines the way illegal DBCS characters are processed:
•
Normal (factory default). Will ignore illegal DBCS characters.
•
As Space. Will insert two space characters (0X20, 0X20) when the data stream contains the illegal DBCS character.
•
As Square. Will insert a black square (0xAIBD) when the data stream contains the illegal DBCS character. This is applicable for the Hanzi Big5 build only.
146
P-Series Emulation
P-Series Emulation
Printer
Protocol
P-Series
* = Factory Default
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Control Code
08
Elongated*
Backspace
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
Wrap LF+CR*
Wrap CR
Disable
Overstrike
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
P-Series
SFCC
1*
(0-7F hex)
VFU Select
EVFU*
DVFU
CVFU
Disable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Character
Set
SFCC d
Command
Double high
PSeries Dbl
High
FF valid at TOF
Normal*
P3/4/6/9 Compat
Enable*
Disable
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Control Code 08
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can define the code to output the following character:
•
Elongated (factory default).
•
Backspace.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
147
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width, causing the excess text to print on the next line.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•
ESC (hex 1B)
•
SOH (hex 01)
•
ETX (hex 03)
•
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)
•
TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur.
148
P-Series Emulation
VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•
EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
•
CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
•
Disable. Disables all VFU processing.
Alt. Set 80-9F
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex
9F as control codes or as printable characters. The options include:
•
Control Code (factory default)
•
Printable.
Character Set
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
SFCC d Command
•
Even dot plot (factory default). This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot.
•
Double High. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.
PSeries Dbl High
Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers.
•
Normal (factory default). This is normal, double-high printing for current model printers.
•
P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers print two dot rows higher, this option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).
FF Valid at TOF
•
Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
149
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Character Set
P-Series Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
Hebrew
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
150
P-Series Emulation
Character Set
Indian Language Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
1
Indian Language firmware
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
Hindi Sets
1
Tamil Sets
1
Gujarati Sets
1
Kannada Sets
1
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
Hindi
Sets
1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
Gujarati
Sets
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
1
Kannada
Sets
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
1
Tamil
Sets
1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
TAM_Tamil’99
TAB_Tamil’00
NOTE: The Indian Language Character Set Menu applies to P-Series and all
LinePrinter+ protocols.
151
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Character Set
(P-Series)
Standard
Sets
Active
Std Sets
IBM PC*
Multinational
EMCA Latin 1
DEC Multi.
CP 858 EURO
IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult.
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French
Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
CP 858
EURO
152
P-Series XQ Emulation
P-Series XQ Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
P-Series
XQ
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Compressed
Print char 01 SOH* char 03 ETX char 09 HT
Elong/Alt.
Font
Elng=BS Font=SO*
Elng=SO Font=BS
HS Print char 02 STX* char 03 ETX char 09 HT
VFU Select
EVFU*
DVFU
CVFU
Disable
Upr. Case
Select
Disable*
Enable
Slew
Relative
1 to 15 lines*
1 to 16 lines
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
153
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received. The next print position is print position
1 of the next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
Compressed Print
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
•
Char 01 SOH (factory default)
•
Char 03 ETX
•
Char 09 HT
Elong/Alt. Font
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and extended character set.
•
Elng=BS Font=SO (factory default)
•
Elng=SO Font=BS
HS Print (High Speed Print)
Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
•
Char 02 STX (factory default)
•
Char 03 ETX
•
Char 09 HT
VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. The choices are:
•
EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
•
CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
•
Disable. Disables all VFU processing.
154
Serial Matrix Emulation
Upr. Case Select
Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.
•
Disable (factory default). Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase, and prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase.
•
Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters received from the computer print as uppercase.
Slew Relative
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew
Relative command is received. The options include:
•
1-15 Lines
•
1-16 Lines (factory default)
Serial Matrix Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
Serial
Matrix
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Overstrike
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Character
Set
ESC d command
Double high
155
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line.
Printer Select
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
156
Serial Matrix Emulation
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Character Set
(such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
ESC d command
•
Even dot plot (factory default). Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot.
•
Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this option for backward compatibility.
157
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu
Character Set
* = Factory Default
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
158
Serial Matrix Emulation
Character Set
(Serial)
Standard
Sets*
IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult.
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French
Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
CP 858
EURO
159
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Proprinter XL Emulation
Printer
Protocol
Proprinter
XL
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
* = Factory Default
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
FF valid at
TOF
Enable*
Disable
Character
Set
Alt. Char
Set
Set 2
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line.
160
Proprinter XL Emulation
FF Valid at TOF
•
Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
Character Set
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
Alt. Char Set
This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.
•
Set 1 (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F as a control code.
•
Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15, and 80 through 9F.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host.
161
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Character Set
Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu
* = Factory Default
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
Active Std Sets
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
OCR-A
OCR-B
Multinational
CP 858 EURO
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
162
Epson FX Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
Epson FX
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
Character
Set
20 CPI
Condensed
Disable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.
•
LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.
163
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Printer Select
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in
“Epson FX Character Set Menu” on page 165.
NOTE: When OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu (page 124)
is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as
European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
164
Epson FX Emulation
Character Set
Epson FX Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
Active Std Sets
Epson Set *
OCR-A
OCR-B
Multinational
Code Page 850
CP 850 EURO
IBM PC
Epson Set
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
ASMO 449*
Sakr CP714
CP 786
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Aptec CP715
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
EBCDIC
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Misc.
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
165
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
ANSI Emulation
* Factory Default
EMULATION
44/48XX-
ANSI
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0* CPI
12.0 CPI
13.3. CPI
15.0 CPI
16.7 CPI
17.1 CPI
Select LPI
6.0* LPI
8.0 LPI
3.0 LPI
4.0 LPI
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Character
Set
Printer
Select
ESC c
Sequence
ON=DC1/OFF=DC3*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up config
Current config
Factory config
Received
CR
Observe*
Ignore
Received
DEL
Observe*
Ignore
Private
Mode
Set 2*
Set 1
Pos. on
BC/OvrSz
Set to top*
Set to bottom
BC Check
Digit by host* by printer
Barcode darkmode
Enable*
Disable
PUM
Default
Decipoints*
Lines/columns
Truncate PI
Slew
Truncate at TOF*
Disable
ETX/ACK
Disable*
Immediate
After Print
166
ANSI Emulation
* = Factory Default
Font Attributes
Typeface Prop.
Spacing
Data Processing*
Gothic NLQ
Char. Graphics
High Speed
Italics NLQ
Courier NLQ
OCR-A
Disable*
Enable
OCR-B
Bold Print
Disable*
Enable
Slashed
Zero
Disable*
Enable
Page Format
Margins Form
Length
Left Margin
0 columns*
(0-369)
Right Margin
0 columns*
(0-369)
Top Margin
0 lines*
(0-451)
Bottom Margin
0 lines*
(0-451)
Funct. of lines
66 lines*
(1-192)
Form Width
Function of CPI
136 Characters*
(1-272)
Character Set
Latin 1 8859-1*
Cyrillic 8859-5
IBM PC-2 CP 437
IBM PC-2 CP 850
Slavic CP 852
Cyrillic CP 855
Fr. Can. CP 863
Russian CP 866
Greek CP 851
Turkish CP 853
Portug. CP 860
Arabic CP 864
Nordic CP 865
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 3 8859-3
Latin 4 8859-4
Lat. Ara. 8859-6
Lat. Gre. 8859-7
Lat. Heb. 8859-8
Latin 5 8859-9
Turkish2 CP 867
Pol. Maz. CP 8576
Turkish CP 8577
Greek CP 8573
Italian CP 23
Spanish CP 24
Latin 9 8859-15
DEC 256 Greek
Turkish CP 857
USA
German
French A
French B
French Canadian
Dutch Netherlds
Italian
United Kingdom
Spanish
Danish/Norw. A
Danish/Norw. B
Danish/Norw. C
Danish/Norw. D
Swed./Finnish A
Swed./Finnish B
Swed./Finnish C
Swed./Finnish D
Swiss
USA
Yugoslavian
United Kingdm A
Turkish
Greek
DEC Mult.
Roman 8
167
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
CPI/LPI Select
Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing.
The number of characters per inch can range from 10.0 through 17.1. The number of lines per inch can range from 3.0 through 8.0.
Font Attributes
Typeface
Choose a typeface from the available options.
Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
•
Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column in the printed text will line up.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
Bold Print
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
•
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
•
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
168
ANSI Emulation
Page Format
Margins
•
Left Margin. Defines where the first print column is located. The left margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the form.
•
Right Margin. Defines where the last print column is located. The right margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the form.
•
Top Margin. Defines the location of the first print line on the page. The top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form's position.
•
Bottom Margin. Defines the location of the last print line on the page.
The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of the form's position.
Form Length
Specifies the form length in lines. The maximum form length in lines depends on the current LPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form length in inches multiplied by the current LPI setting. For example, at 6 LPI the maximum form length is 6 LPI x 24 inches = 144 lines.
Only valid form length values will be accepted. If you select a length that is larger than the maximum length for the current LPI, the maximum length will be used. If you need a longer page length, you must first change the LPI.
IMPORTANT
If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI, the effective page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new
LPI.
NOTE: Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel.
Form Width
Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272. The maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI setting.
Only valid form width values will be accepted. If a width is selected that is larger than the maximum width for the current CPI, then the maximum width will be used. If a larger width value is desired, then the CPI value must be changed first.
169
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Table 12 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a
given Characters Per Inch (CPI) setting.
IMPORTANT
If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed, the effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in characters divided by the new CPI.
Table 12. Form Width
CPI Setting
10.0
12.0
13.3
15.0
16.7
17.1
Maximum Form Width
(in characters)
136
163
181
204
227
272
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). No extra line feeds are inserted.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap
Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the form width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable . Discards any data past the form width.
170
ANSI Emulation
Define LF Code
Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation. Note that when 0876 OCR-A or 0877 OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
Printer Select
•
ON = DC1/OFF = DC3 (factory default). Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
•
Disable. Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes.
ESC c Sequence
•
Enable (factory default). An ESC c code received from the host resets the printer parameters to the factory defaults.
•
Disable. An ESC c code received from the host is ignored.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•
Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed.
Received CR
•
Observe (factory default). A CR code received from the host is handled as a carriage return.
•
Ignore. A CR code received from the host is ignored.
171
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Received DEL
•
Observe (factory default). A DEL code received from the host is handled as a Delete command.
•
Ignore. A DEL code received from the host is ignored.
Private Mode
Determines the default type of character set (Set 1 or Set 2). This can also be set by ESC sequences ESC [>5h and ESC [>5l. Refer to these descriptions in the ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual for further details.
Pos. on BC/OvrSz
•
Set to top (factory default). The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes or oversized characters after they are printed. This allows printing on the same line.
•
Set to bottom. The printer will continue printing without backing up.
BC Check Digit
•
By host (factory default). The host calculates the barcode check digit and sends it along with the barcode. The check digit is not verified by the printer but printed as it was received.
•
By printer. The barcode is sent without the check digit, and the printer calculates and adds it in.
Barcode Darkmode
•
Enable (factory default). The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution.
•
Disable. The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher speed.
PUM Default
This is the Unit of Measure (UOM) as it is used within the ANSI emulation.
Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs:
•
Decipoints (factory default). A unit of 1/720 inch
•
Lines or columns. Uses the current LPI and CPI values.
The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting.
Truncate PI Slew
•
Truncate at TOF (factory default). The slew is terminated when the next
Top-of-Form is reached. (This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only.)
•
Disable. PI slews will be completed independent of their length.
172
IGP/PGL Emulation
ETX/ACK
End of Text/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text
(ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it acknowledges the
ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Immediate
•
Afterprint
IGP/PGL Emulation
The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor
(IGP) for the line matrix family of printers. It is based upon, and is compatible with, the IGP-100/200/400 board using the PGL. The IGP graphics processing features are detailed below.
Features
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with userselectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered when the form is created), be overlaid onto the form (positioned in a specific location after the form is created), or can be dynamically merged with the form.
Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of barcodes is available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state USPS Intelligent
Mail, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/
UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, Datamatrix, and
PDF417. UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add-on data.
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, and 20 characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal, expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background.
173
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a specified reference point.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets, each 96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.
Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel
You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings.
174
IGP/PGL Submenu
IGP/PGL Submenu
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
IGP/PGL
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Autowrap
Disable*
Enable
PGL
SFCC
7E*
1-FF
16*
15
PI Slew
Range
CR Edit
Disable*
Enable
Select
Font
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
6.0*
8.0
9.0
10.0
Select LPI Auto
Uppercase
Disable*
Enable
Skip Cmd
Prefix
Enable*
Disable
Forms
Handling
Disable*
Auto Eject
Auto TOF
Power On
IGP/PGL
Enable*
Disable
Ext Execute
Copy
Disable*
Enable
Barcode
Options
Host Form
Length
Disable*
Enable
Var Form
Adjust
00.0 inches*
(00.0 – 03.0 inches)
Var Form
Type
Add Nothing*
Add; 0
Add; X
Compressed
CPI
Disable*
Light Font
Dark Font
Ignore
Char
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
(0-255)
Compatbl.
Mode
None*
MVP
L150
P3000
P6000
P9000
Expanded
Font
Scalable*
Block
Alt Block 1
Alt Block 2
Scalable
Size
Normal*
Block
Power-on
S-Mode
0*
(0 - 5)
Trunc Dyn
Data
Disable*
Enable
Error
Report
On*
Debug Mode
Fault
Host
Off
True Form
Slew
Enable*
Disable
Printer PI
Line
Enable*
Disable
Quality
Data Processing*
High
Best
175
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Define CR (Carriage Return) Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not perform a line feed. The next print position will be print position 1 of the current line.
•
CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Define LF (Line Feed) Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return.
The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin.
•
Disable (factory default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF is received.
•
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command.
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•
16 (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
•
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds.
•
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are not followed by line feeds.
176
IGP/PGL Submenu
Select Font
Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
PGL. Refer to “IGP/PGL Font Set Menu” on page 184. for available
selections.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
•
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. The options are:
•
6.0 (factory default)
•
8.0
•
9.0
•
10.0
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.
•
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Skip Cmd Prefix
This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received.
•
Enable (factory default). The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP command.
•
Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP command.
Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:
•
Disable (factory default). No effect.
•
Auto Eject. Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page.
•
Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of each form to the next top of form.
177
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Power On IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on.
•
Enable (factory default). The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
•
Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)
Ext Execute Copy
•
Disable (factory default). Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)
•
Enable. Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form
Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case, the exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for the Form
Count. However, incremental data is not incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed on a separate page.
* = Factory Default
Barcode
Options
UPC
Descenders
Always*
Never
Only with PDF
Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
I-2/5
Selection
AI 00
Spaces
Leading Zero*
Trailing Space
X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD
Disable*
Enable
Select SO
Char
14*
(0-255)
User-Def
Ratio
Enable*
Disable
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Options
The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode printing.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human readable data is not present in the UPC/EAN barcodes.
•
Always (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•
Never. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data.
•
Only with PDF. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is present.
178
IGP/PGL Submenu
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including
Code 39 and I-2/5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-X00 printers.
•
Disable (factory default). Use standard barcode ratios.
•
Enable. Select the alternate barcode ratios.
I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.
Usually, if I-2/5 barcodes have an odd number of digits, a leading zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode instead.
•
Leading Zero (factory default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the printable data field.
•
Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the printable data field and a zero is encoded with the corresponding space in the end of the barcode.
•
X2 DPD. When selected, an I-2/5 barcode with an X2 magnification will use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for compatibility issues.
•
Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit.
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Select SO Char
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO (Shift Out) as the control code. This allows access for the alternate set of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
User-Def Ratio
•
Enable (factory default). User-defined ratios are accepted for barcodes.
•
Disable. User-defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used in its place.
179
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new.
•
Disable (factory default) Uses the current way of decoding.
•
Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
Host Form Length
Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command
changes the form length designated in the LP+ menu (see “LinePrinter Plus
Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)” on page 124) when the form is printed
by the EXECUTE command.
•
Disable (factory default). The LP+ form length is unaffected by the form being printed.
•
Enable. The LP+ form length changes to match the length of the PGL form being printed.
Var Form Adjust
(Ranges from 0 - 30). Default is 0. This menu value is tenths of inches. The value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that have variable form lengths. Variable length forms are forms that are defined by using a “;0” in the CREATE statement: ~CREATE;FORM;0. Variable form lengths are defined by the contents within the form - the form is only as long as necessary to print the form. Changing this menu value adds additional lengths to the form (in tenths of inches). Again, this only applies to forms that use the “;0” variable length forms.
Var Form Type
This menu option applies only to the host command, CREATE;NAME or
CREATE;NAME;DISK. The host command CREATE;NAME followed by ;0, ;X or a form length number will always override the menu option.
•
Add Nothing (factory default). No action.
•
Add; 0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed element. Same as CREATE;NAME;0.
•
Add; X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page length.
Compressed CPI
This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter) for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character.
•
Disable (factory default). The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.
•
Light Font. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.
•
Dark Font. Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with the IGP-X00 printers.
180
IGP/PGL Submenu
Ignore Char
•
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu.
•
Disable (factory default). The PGL does not ignore any characters.
•
Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select
Character menu.
•
Select Char
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host.
Compatbl. Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select the “None” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.
When replacing an older product operating with an existing application, especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands, you may need to select a compatibility mode. In this case, select the printer model number option that most closely matches the printer being replaced. The Compatibility
Mode options include:
•
None (factory default)
•
MVP
•
L150
•
P3000
•
P6000
•
P9000
Expanded Font
This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select:
•
Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded edges.
•
Block. These are block characters compatible with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•
Alt Block 1 / Alt Block 2. Reserved block sets used only for compatibility purposes.
Scalable Size
•
Normal (factory default). Controls the size of scalable characters to be either normal size (as set by the user) or adjusted to match the size of block fonts.
•
Block. Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block font alternative.
181
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
True Form Slew
This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE command. Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option enabled.
•
Enable (factory default). Form length is accurate according to the form length parameter in the CREATE command.
•
Disable. Form length is IGP-X00 compatible when using PMODE.
Printer PI Line
This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the form.
•
Enable (factory default). Send the PI instructions to the printer
(LinePrinter Plus) during form slew. This is IGP-X00 compatible.
•
Disable. Do not send PI instructions to the printer. LFs are sent instead.
Print Quality
•
Data Processing (factory default). The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes. This mode should be set if you want the highest speed.
•
High. The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi, but all alphanumerics and barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode.
•
Best. The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode, which produces a higher resolution, better-looking print image.
Power-on S-Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select “0,” the default option.
Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.
Power on S-Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at powerup. The default is 0 (disabled, no power-on mode). To use this feature, select a mode from 1 through 5, which puts IGP/PGL in an SMODE state according to the compatibility mode set. If the compatibility mode set is None, then MVP is assumed by default.
For more information, see the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
182
IGP/PGL Submenu
Trunc Dyn Data
This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode.
•
Disable (factory default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, an error will report.
•
Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data truncates.
Error Report
Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.
•
On (factory default). Form boundary error checking reported. Any element which falls off the current page is reported as an error.
•
Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is defined in Create Form mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.
•
Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed and the message “IGP/
PGL ERROR” appears on the printer front panel. The printer then stops printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the printer can resume normal operation.
•
Host. When an error occurs, the error message is sent back to the host.
•
Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries.
Select Font
Allows you to choose from various character sets, including IGP/PGL
Standard sets, 256 character multinational sets, and UTF-8 encoded
Unicode™.
183
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
IGP/PGL Font Set Menu
Select Font
* = Factory Default
Active Font
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
184
IGP/VGL Emulation
IGP/VGL Emulation
Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP) emulation of the QMS
®
Code V Version II programming language produces online forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics processing features are detailed below.
Features
OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal, solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features.
Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available barcodes are Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and
C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state
USPS Intelligent Mail, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction. A dark print mode is included for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated 180, or rotated 270 degrees.
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 (cpi), permitting up to
170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal, expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features, which provides a “customized” appearance for forms, reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV
®
, GS-
Mark, UL
®
, and CSA
®
symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and you can also define custom symbols.
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a specified reference point.
Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.
Based on the Multinational Character Set, you can create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.
185
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel
You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely.
IGP/VGL Submenu
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
IGP/VGL
SFCC &
Pwrup
VGL SFCC
5E*
(11-FF hex)
Power-up ^X
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^F
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^PY
Disable*
Enable
8
9
6*
7
10
LPI Graphics
Options
Error
Handling
Error Msgs
Enable*
Disable
Error Markers
Enable*
Disable
Offpage Errors
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Errors
Enable*
Disable
Ignore/DB8
Setup
Ignore Chars
Disable*
Char 1
Char 2
Char 1&2
Ignore Ch#1
0* (0-255)
Ignore Ch#2
0* (0-255)
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
Font Set
PI Control
Printer PI
Disable*
Enable
Host PI
Disable*
Enable
Max PI 16
Enable*
Disable
Prt to
Emulate
Disable*
MVP/MVP 150B
L150
P3040
P6000
P9000
186
IGP/VGL Submenu
IGP/VGL Graphics Options Submenu
* = Factory Default
Graphics
Options
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
Ignore Dots
Disable*
Enable
Append
Rotated
Disable*
Enable
Truncate
Alpha
Enable*
Disable
True Vert
1/10
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After
^PY
Absorb Motion*
Absorb All
Disable
UPC
Descenders
Enable*
Disable
Rot. Char
Size
Adjusted*
Not Adjusted
Ignore
Spaces
Disable*
Enable
Midline PY
Disable*
Enable
Quality
Expanded
Font
Data Processing*
High
Scalable*
Block
LP+ Font
Disable*
Enable
IGP110
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
MSI Check
Digit
Print*
Don’t Print
I25
Selection
AI 00
Spaces
I25 Odd Data*
Leading Zero
Check Digit
Convert Alpha
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Auto FF at ^PN
Disable*
Enable
Width Limit
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After
^PN
Disable*
Enable
PDF Size
Comp.
Disable*
Enable
C128 Mode
Comp
Disable*
Enable
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Ignore ^Lxx
Cmd.
Disable*
Enable
SFCC & Pwrup
This option has several sub-options which define the SFCC and power-up configuration used with VGL.
VGL SFCC
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value 5E.
Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC.
187
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Power Up ^X
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default and selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored until a ^A command is received.
Power Up ^F
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default and selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below hex 20 sent from the host.
Power Up ^PY
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.
LPI
The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Graphics Options
The following are several options which configure printing output.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
•
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Ignore Dots
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only
1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.
Append Rotated
•
Disable (factory default). Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements.
•
Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise, counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.
188
IGP/VGL Submenu
Truncate Alpha
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right side of the form. The options include:
•
Enable (factory default)
•
Disable
True Vert 1/10
•
Disable (factory default). A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as
7/72 of an inch. The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For example, a one-inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that have the same value are identical in length.
•
Enable. A vertical 1/10 inch parameter is used as 1/10 inch. Rounding occurs to the nearest 1/72 inch. This can cause vertical moves that have the same value to differ by
±
1/72 inch.
Absorb After ^PY
•
Absorb Motion (factory default). The first paper motion following a ^PY command is ignored.
•
Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host generated motion terminator is detected.
•
Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion.
UPC Descenders
•
Enable (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•
Disable. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data.
Rot. Char Size
•
Adjusted (factory default). Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters.
•
Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters are the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters.
Ignore Spaces
•
Disable (factory default). Trailing spaces are not deleted from the last alphanumeric element in a graphics pass.
•
Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from the last alphanumeric element in a graphics pass.
189
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Midline PY (includes ^PN)
•
Disable (factory default). The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY, must be the first three characters of a line.
•
Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.
Print Quality
•
Data Processing (factory default). ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi. This mode should be set if the highest speed is desired.
•
High. ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at
120 x 72 dpi.
Expanded Font
•
Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded edges.
•
Block. These are block characters compatible with IGP-X10 printers.
LP+ Font
•
Disable (factory default). The IGP/VGL uses its default half-dot font, which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP+ at 12,
13, 15 and 17 cpi.
•
Enable. The IGP/VGL uses the same font as used by LP+ at all cpi.
MSI Check Digit
•
Print (factory default). The check digit is appended at the end of the printable data field for MSI barcodes.
•
Don't Print. The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print.
I25 Selection
•
I25 Odd Data (factory default). When an odd number of data is provided, the default setting, Leading Zero, will add a zero to the beginning of the bar code data. The setting, Check Digit, will add a check digit to the end of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data.
•
Convert Alpha. Disable is the default. When enabled, each non-digit I25 bar code character will convert to “0.”
NOTE: If you use an Interleaved 2/5 barcode that automatically adds the check digit (type code k or l, IBARC type code INT2/5CD or INT2/
5CDA), the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is set.
190
IGP/VGL Submenu
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Width Limit
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. The system will limit the length and width for expanded
characters to a limit shown in Table 13, which displays the maximum
width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0 through 4.0 inches).
Height Param.
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
00
01
02
03
04
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
Table 13. Width Limit Table
Max. Width
Allowed
21
23
26
28
11
13
16
18
99
99
3
6
8
41
43
46
48
31
33
36
38
Height Param.
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
21
22
23
24
25
38
39
40
34
35
36
37
Max. Width
Allowed
73
76
78
81
63
66
68
71
51
53
56
58
61
93
96
98
83
86
88
91
Absorb After ^PN
•
Disable (factory default). All line terminators that follow the ^PN command are sent to the printer and processed.
•
Enable. The first motion line terminator that follows the ^PN command is ignored.
191
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
IGP110 Compatbl.
This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP-10 with respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.
•
Disable (factory default). The IGP does not emulate the IGP-10 mode.
•
Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-10 version.
Auto FF at ^PN
•
Disable (factory default). A form feed will not be generated automatically when the ^PN command is encountered.
•
Enable. A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of the next form when the ^PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at top of form.
PDF Size Comp.
This option is for compatibility of the font size of the barcode printable data field on the old build.
•
Disable (factory default). Uses the normal font size.
•
Enable. Matches the font size of the old build.
C128 Mode Comp
The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch.
•
Disable (factory default). Uses auto mode switch.
•
Enable. Matches the old build on the auto mode switch.
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new.
•
Disable (disable). Uses the current way of decoding.
•
Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
Ignore ^Lxx Cmd.
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. The ^Lxx command will always be ignored.
192
IGP/VGL Submenu
Error Handling
Following are several options which define how errors are reported.
Error Msgs
•
Enable (factory default). Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect.
•
Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.
Error Markers
•
Enable (factory default). Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off-page error.
Offpage Errors
•
Disable (factory default). Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page.
•
Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page.
Barcode Errors
•
Enable (factory default). An error message will print when invalid barcode data is encountered.
•
Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data; the barcode will be skipped.
NOTE: When the Barcode Errors option is disabled, the VGL emulation will try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum data length requirements for some barcodes. Not all errors will be corrected.
Ignore / DB8 Setup
Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8.
Ignore Chars
•
Disable (factory default). Character filtering is not enabled.
•
Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#1” to specify character 1.
•
Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#2” to specify character 2.
•
Char 1 & 2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore
CH#1” and “Ignore CH#2” to specify values for these characters.
193
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Ignore CH#1
Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255.
Ignore CH#2
Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255.
Data Bit 8
•
Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, Data Bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable Data Bit 8, and enable the Host
PI configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).
NOTE: Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal, but never both. When enabled as Data Bit 8, Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used,
Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access characters in the hex 80-FF range, Data Bit 8 must be enabled.
Font Set
The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
VGL. Refer to “IGP/VGL Font Set Menu” on page 196 for available selections.
PI Control
Printer PI
•
Disable (factory default). The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled.
•
Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.
Host PI
•
Disable (factory default). The host does not send PI signals.
•
Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.
194
IGP/VGL Submenu
Max PI 16
•
Enable (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
•
Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line.
Prt To Emulate
This option allows you to select an earlier model printer/IGP board combination to emulate. When a printer emulation is selected, the scaling command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density as the printer emulation chosen. Five types of printers can be emulated: MVP or MVP 150B, L150, P3040, P6000, and P9000. Once a printer emulation is selected, it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer emulation is selected. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option, which insures the printer behaves as described in this manual. The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL functionality. Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped with high resolution hammer bank tips (12 mil).
195
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
IGP/VGL Font Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Font Set
Active Font
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Standard
Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP 714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic
Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
196
IPDS Emulation
IPDS Emulation
* Factory Default
EMULATION
IPDS
Font Size Print Quality
Select By Host*
Standard
Compressed
Select By Host*
Default Font
Graphics
Quality
High*
Select By Host
Low
Barcode
Quality
High*
Select By Host
Low
Barcode
Speed
High*
Select By Host
Low
Early Print
Comp
Off*
On
Graphics
Scaling
Rounded*
Exact
I2/5
Checksum
Standard (1/3)*
Special (4/9)
Default Code
Page
Internat. Set 5*
English/USA/Can
Austrian/German
Belgian Old
Brazilian
Canadian/French
Danish/Norw.
Finnish/Swedish
French Azerty
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Katakana
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English (UK)
Arabic
Greek
Icelandic
Turkish Latin 5
Latin 2/ROECE
Cyrillic Old
Thai
Hebrew
Farsi
Yugoslavian
Latin 9
Euro US/Can.
Euro Aust/Germ.
Euro Dan/Norw.
Euro Fin/Swed.
Euro Italian
Euro Spanish
Euro UK/Ireland
Euro French
Euro Internat.
Euro Icelandic
Euro Latin 2
Internat. Set 1
Dan/Norw. (ALT)
Fin/Swed (ALT)
Spanish (ALT)
Greek Old
Hebrew Old
OCR A
OCR B
Turkish Old
Cyrillic
Baltic Mult
Estonian
OCR B Katakana
197
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
* Factory Default
Code Page
Subset
Thai
Version 0*
Version 1
Version 2
Default
Font
DRAFT 10*
DRAFT 12
DRAFT 13
DRAFT 15
DRAFT 17
DRAFT 18
DP 10
DP 12
DP 13
DP 15
DP 17
DP 18
NLQ 10
NLQ 12
NLQ 13
NLQ 15
NLQ 17
NLQ 18
OCRA
OCRB
PSM
VPA Check
Enable*
Disable
Hexdump
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Print IPDS
Fonts
Undef Char
Subst
0x60*
0x40 - 0xFE
Emulation
Mode
None*
4234
67xx
64xx/65xx
4224
A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the
IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual (GC31-3879).
Sending a non-IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result in a hung spool file or writer.
Font Size
This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS.
•
Select By Host (factory default). The font ID is only affected by host commands.
•
Standard. The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID.
•
Compressed. The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID.
Print Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality.
•
Select By Host (factory default). The application decides the print quality.
•
Default Font. The default font the printer uses.
198
IPDS Emulation
Graphics Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics.
•
High (factory default). Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch.
•
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the graphics.
•
Low. Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch.
Barcode Quality
This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels.
•
High (factory default). Label is printed at 144 dots per inch.
•
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
•
Low. Label is printed at 72 dots per inch.
Barcode Speed
This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels.
•
High (factory default). Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots, increasing printing speed, but decreasing print quality.
•
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
•
Low. Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots, decreasing printing speed, but increasing print quality.
Early Print Comp (Complete)
This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller.
•
Off (factory default). Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely.
•
On. Print Comp is sent immediately. The next page will be created. This improves the print performance when starting the next page.
NOTE: When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose data.
Graphics Scaling
This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mapping
Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO
FIT:
•
Rounded (factory default). Calculations are rounded up in the desired output resolution.
•
Exact. Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible.
199
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
I2/5 Checksum
This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes.
•
Standard (1/3) (factory default). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3 and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum.
•
Special (4/9). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum.
NOTE: “Odd” refers to the 1st, 3rd, 5th... character in the barcode, while
“even” refers to the 2nd, 4th, 6th... character in the barcode.
Default Code Page
Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation.
Code Page Subset
When the Thai code page is selected as the default, either from the front panel or by a host command, you may choose from three different versions.
Default Font
Choose a font quality and size from the available selections. All fonts in the
Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical
VPA Check
•
Enable (factory default). The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area, the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling
Control command setting requires error reporting.
•
Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area.
Hexdump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems.
Print IPDS Fonts
This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation
200
IPDS Emulation
Undef Char Subst
Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received by the host.
•
0x60 (Factory default)
•
0x40 - 0xFE
Emulation Mode
Specifies the printer model to emulate.
•
None (Factory default) Use this option when a legacy configuration is loaded with PNE.
•
4234 IBM 4234
•
67xx Decision Data 67xx
•
64xx/65xx IBM 6400 / 6500 Series
•
4224 IBM 4224
201
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
PCL - II Emulation
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
PCL-II
Primary Char.
Set
Second Char.
Set
Page Length
Rep.
ID
0* - 109
Symbol Set
Pitch
10.00*, 12.00,
13.30, 15.00,
16.67, 20.00
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
ID
0* - 109
Symbol Set
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
Inches/Page*
Lines/Page
High Speed
Max. Line
Width
13.2 inches*
13.6 inches
Graphics
Density
60 DPI*
70 DPI
Disable*
Display
Functns
Disable*
Enable
Line
Terminator
LF After CR
Disable*
Enable
CR After LF
Disable*
Enable
CR After FF
Disable*
Enable
CR After VT
Disable
Enable*
Face CPI
Delay
Enable*
Disable
PTX
Linefeed
Disable*
Enable
Symbol Set
Delay
Disable*
Enable
LPI Adjust
6 LPI*
8 LPI
Page L./Lines Page L./Inches
11.0 Inches *
2.0 – 16.0 Inches
11.0 Inches *
2.0 – 16.0 Inches
Config. Print Symbol Set
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Current Config*
Factory Config
Disable
Power Up Config
202
Primary
Char. set
Symbol Set
Roman-8[8U]*
Turkish-8[8T]
Arab-8[8V]
Cyrillic[8R]
PC858 MtLi[13U]
MC Text[12J]
Roman-9[4U]
Latin-9[9N]
Win3.0Lat-1[9U]
Hebrew Old
Japan Postnet
Katakana Post
ASCII[0U]
Math Sym[0A/0M]
LineDraw[0B/0L]
IS0 Den/Nor[0D]
Roman Ext.[0E]
IS0 UK[1E]
IS0 France[0F]
IS0 German[0G]
Hebrew[0H]
Japan ASCII[0K]
Katakana[1K]
Block Char[1L]
OCR-A[0O]
OCR-B[1O]
ISO Swe/Fin[0S]
ISO Spain[1S]
ISO Italian[0I]
ISO Portugu[4S]
Latin-1[0N]
Latin-2[2N]
Latin-5[5N]
Latin-6[6N]
Baltic[19L]
PC8 DanNor[11U]
PC8 Cd437[10U]
PC850 MtLi[12U]
PC851 LtGk[12G]
PC852 Lat2[17U]
PC Turkish[9T]
PC Hebrew[15H]
PC Lat/Ara[10V]
PC Cyrillic[3R]
Win3.1Lat1[19U]
Win3.1Lat-2[9E]
Win3.1Lat-5[5T]
Math-8[8M]
PS Math[5M]
Greek-7[12N]
Postnet4[15Y]
Postnet11.25
Greek-8[8G]
Hebrew-8[8H]
Katakana-8[8K]
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Secondary
Char. Set
Symbol Set
(same as Primary
Character Set)
PCL - II Emulation
203
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Primary Char. Set
You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx
to indicate that the current character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set.
Second Char. Set
Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them, send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out
(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).
Page Length Rep.
•
Inches/Page (factory default). All page length calculations are based on the inches displayed on the panel.
•
Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.
The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.
For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically
13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in
Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.
Max Line Width
Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (factory default) or 13.6 inches.
Face CPI Delay
Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.
•
Enable (factory default). Different font densities can be used on the same line.
•
Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.
Graphics Density
Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (factory default) or 70 DPI.
Perforation Skip
•
Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
•
Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.
204
PCL - II Emulation
Display Functions
•
Disable (factory default). Control characters are not printed.
•
Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a useful debugging tool.
Line Terminator
You can define the action of the line. Four options are available: LF after CR,
CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another.
PTX Linefeed
•
Disable (factory default). Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment.
•
Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment.
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
PTX Linefeed Enabled
Linefeed
PTX Linefeed Disabled
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
Linefeed
LPI Adjust
This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (factory default) or 8 LPI.
Page L./Lines
This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi, or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.
NOTE: If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an invalid length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value, the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines).
Similarly, selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines.
Page L./Inches
This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.
205
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Config Print
This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected values.
Symbol Set Print
This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number prints to the left of the character set sample.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•
Current Config (factory default). If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received.
•
Disable. The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received.
LG Emulation
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
LG
Font Vert. Forms Horiz Forms Autowrap
Bot Frm 66/6
Top Mrg 0/6
Bot Mrg 66/6
Left Mrg 00.0*
Right Mrg 13.2
No*
Yes
= FF*
FF
= CR + FF
CR
= CR*
= CR + LF
Unsolicited
Rpt
No*
Small
Big
Print Mode
Opt
Enable*
Disable
Plot Mode
Opt
Enable*
Disable
I-2/5 Guard
Bars
Enable*
Disable
LF
= LF*
= CR + LF
206
Font
Style
DP 10 6*
DP 10 8
DP 12 6
DP 12 8
DP 15 6
DP 15 8
DP 15 10
HS 10 6
CORESPON 5 6
CORESPON 5 8
CORESPON 6 6
CORESPON 6 8
CORESPON 10 6
CORESPON 10 8
CORESPON 12 6
CORESPON 12 8
CORESPON 15 6
CORESPON 15 8
CORESPON 15 10
OCR A
OCR B
COMPRESS 6 6
COMPRESS 6 8
COMPRESS 8 6
COMPRESS 8 8
COMPRESS 13 6
COMPRESS 13 8
COMPRESS 13 10
COMPRESS 16 6
COMPRESS 16 8
COMPRESS 16 10
DP 5 6
DP 5 8
DP 6 6
DP 6 8
Character Set
GL Char Set
U.S. ASCII*
DEC Finnish
French
DEC Fr. Can.
German
Italian
JIS Roman
DEC Nor./Dan.
Spanish
DEC Swedish
DEC Great Brit.
ISO Nor./Dan.
DEC Dutch
DEC Swiss
DEC Portuguese
VT100 Graphics
DEC Suppl.
DEC Technical
ISO Katakana
7-Bit Hebrew
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
GR Char Set
DEC Suppl.*
DEC Technical
VT100 Graphics
ISO Katakana
ISO Latin 1
ISO Latin 2
ISO Latin 5
ISO Latin 9
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
LG Emulation
207
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Font
Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation, as follows:
•
Style. This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) setting, in the format Type cpi lpi. The default setting is DP 10 6 (Data Processing, 10 cpi, 6 lpi). The print quality types you may choose from are as follows:
DP = Data Processing (standard quality)
CORESPON = Correspondence (near letter quality)
COMPRESS = Compressed (vertically compressed for printing long graphs and charts)
OCR A & OCR B = Optical Character Recognition, sets A and B
HS = High Speed (Draft quality for high speed printing)
•
Character Set. This option allows you to select a character set. The character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets, which include the U.S. ASCII set and several foreign language and special character sets.
Vert Forms
•
Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.
•
Top Mrg 6/0.This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other.
•
Bot Mrg 66/6. This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to
198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.
208
LG Emulation
Horiz Forms
•
Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other.
•
Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The default value is 13.2. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin.
•
No (factory default). Any print data received past the forms width setting is discarded.
•
Yes. An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is received past the forms width setting.
CR
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
= CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return.
•
= CR + LF. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a
Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. (Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line
Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return.)
LF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
= LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
= CR + LF. Each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.
209
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
FF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
= FF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next form.
•
= CR + FF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next form.
Unsolicited Rpt
This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred.
•
No (factory default). Disables all unsolicited status reports from the printer.
•
Small. Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host.
•
Big. Enables extended, unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host.
Print Mode Opt
When enabled, this option affects the SPI, SHS, and DECSHORP commands. The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation. For SHS and
DECSHORP, the character size will change with the selected pitch. In addition, SGR attributes such as bold, crossed-out, and italics, will be done in print mode with greater efficiency.
•
Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
•
Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with older LG printer products.
Plot Mode Opt
When enabled, this option will plot with greater efficiency, particularly with respect to the Postnet barcode. Postnet is printed in the same density as the current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible.
•
Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
•
Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with older LG printer products.
I-2/5 Guard Bars
•
Enable (factory default). Horizontal guard bars are printed above and below each Interleaved 2/5 bar code. This option only applies to
Interleaved 2/5 bar codes.
•
Disable. Interleaved 2/5 bar codes are printed normally, with no guard bars.
210
Arabic Context Analyzer
The Arabic firmware offers outstanding performance in terms of Arabization features and is intended for applications requiring Arabic and Latin high print quality under different Arabization platforms. It supports many Arabization mechanisms and many
Arabic and Latin code sets.
Theory of Operation
The Arabic printer is equipped with a built-in front end analyzer that preprocesses all incoming data from a host before it is sent to the LinePrinter Plus emulation. This front-end analyzer has two functions:
1.
Cross-emulation: Translates all incoming commands from the host to the
LinePrinter Plus emulation.
2.
Arabization: Processes all incoming printable characters from the host and
Arabizes them line by line.
This figure shows the printer shows where the Front End Analyzer resides in the data stream. Data is pre-processed by the Analyzer before it is handed over to the
LinePrinter Plus printer emulation.
Front-end Analyzer Features
•
Multi emulation support: ANSI, Epson FX, Epson LQ, HP, C.Itoh, and IBM.
•
Multi font support (Naskh, Kofi, Reqa'a,...).
•
Multi Arabization Mechanisms: 7-bit with switching codes, 7-bit with escape sequences, 8-bit Pure, 8-bit neutrals, 8-bit with switching codes, and 8-bit with escape sequences.
•
17 Latin code sets.
•
48 Arabic code sets.
•
Many configurable Arabization parameters to suit almost any Arabic application available in the market.
211
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
212
Analyzer Activate
When the analyzer is deactivated all incoming data from the host is passed directly through the Analyzer to the LinePrinter Plus printer emulation without any processing. The Analyzer only responds to the command: activate analyzer.
•
Yes (factory default). The emulations under the Analyzer menu are active.
•
No. The data is passed down to the LinePrinter Plus printer emulation without any modification.
Input Emulation
Set the input emulation according to the application you are using.
•
Epson FX (factory default). The Epson-FX emulation.
•
Epson LQ, Proprinter XL, HP, ANSI, CITOH. Other available emulations.
Automatic Carriage Return
When Auto CR is enabled, the analyzer sends the printer a Carriage Return each time it receives a Line Feed. The default is Disabled.
NOTE: You have to use this item to enable the Auto Carriage Return instead of the menu under the LinePrinter Plus menu as long as the analyzer is active.
Automatic Line Feed
When Auto LF is enabled, the analyzer sends the printer a Line Feed each time it receives a Carriage Return. The default is Disabled.
NOTE: When you want to enable the Auto Line Feed (Auto LF), use the item under the analyzer menu not the one under the LinePrinter Plus menu as long as the analyzer is active.
PUM (Position Unit Mode)
This menu only has an effect when the Analyzer emulation is set to ANSI. It has two different possible values:
•
Decipoints (factory default). The printer interprets ANSI escape sequence parameters as decipoint values.
•
Lines/Columns. The printer interprets ANSI escape sequence parameters as line or column counts.
Default Data Processing
Your printer has two “Data Process” typefaces: Normal & Enhanced. This menu item is effective when using the Arabic Windows Driver:
•
Data Processing. The normal typeface used for Data Processing.
•
Enhanced DP (factory default). This version of Data Processing typeface is printed at a lower speed than the normal “Data Process” typeface.
However, the “Enhanced DP” is a better quality than the normal “Data
Process” typeface.
NOTE: When using SEDCO Windows printer driver, all menu items under the analyzer are ignored except for this menu item. If the “Printer Font
Name” in the driver properties under “Device Settings” is set to “Data
Process”, then the value of “Default DP” menu item selects between the “Data Processing” and “DP Enhanced” typefaces.
Wrap Around
When the user sends a long line (longer than what the printer expects) to the printer, the remaining characters will be printed on the next line if the Wrap
Around menu item is enabled. If this item is disabled the printer will not print the rest of the line. The default is Disabled.
Form Feed Absorb
When Form Feed Absorb is enabled and a form feed character (0C hex) is received, it will not have an effect. If Form Feed Absorb is disabled, then a form feed character will advance the paper to the next top of form, and move the logical print position to the first character column. The default is Disabled.
Custom Settings
This menu item should be set to zero for normal behavior. To use UTF-8 as your Right Code Set, set the “Custom Settings” to three. The default is Zero.
213
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
214
Arabization Menus
The menus in the Arabization section are equivalent to ESC commands and their options as described in the Arabic Programmer’s Reference Manual.
215
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation
EMULATION
Postscript/PDF
* = Factory Default
1
Values for standard printers.
2
Values for HD printers.
Resolution
120x144 DPI*
1
90x96 DPI
1
180x180 DPI*
180x90 DPI
2
90x180 DPI
2
120x120 DPI
2
2
90x90 DPI
2
Paper Size
Custom
Width
Length
US Fanfold*
Letter
Legal
Executive
A3
A4
A5
A6
10x14 Inch
12x12 Inch
13.6x12 Inch
Tabloid 11x17in
JIS B5
US Folio
No. 10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
C6 Envelope
ISO B5
Paper Size
Fault
Ignore*
Fault
Clip Page
Enable*
Disable
Move to TOF Gray Adjust
Disable
At End of Job
At End of Page*
0*
-10 to 10
Postscript/PDF Interpreter
The Postscript/PDF data is handled by Ghostscript by Artifex, an interpreter compatible with the following:
•
Portable Document Format (“PDF”) 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 as defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual, distributed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
•
PostScript (TM) Language Level 3, as defined in the PostScript Language
Reference Third Edition (ISBN 0-201-37922-8), published by Addison-
Wesley in mid-1999.
216
Ghostscript includes a set of 35 scalable outline fonts in PostScript Type 1 format, compatible in appearance and metrics with the fonts commonly distributed under the following names:
•
Bookman (demi, demi italic, light, light italic)
•
Courier ((plain, oblique, bold, bold oblique)
•
Avant Garde (book, book oblique, demi, demi oblique)
•
Helvetica (plain, oblique, bold, bld oblique narrow, narrow oblique, narrow bold, narrow bold oblique)
•
Palatino (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
•
New Century Schoolbook (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
•
Times (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
•
Symbol
•
Zapf Chancery (medium italic)
•
Zapf Dingbats
The Ghostscript version used in the P8000 is 8.71.
Resolution
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard products:
•
120x144 DPI (factory default)
•
90x96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD products:
•
180x180 DPI (factory default)
•
180x90 DPI
•
90x180 DPI
•
120x120 DPI
•
90x90 DPI
217
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Paper Size
This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. This parameter should be set according to the dimensions of the physical paper installed in the printer. This parameter will be used to determine the TOF and is expected to change when new media is installed. Available options include:
•
Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
•
Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
•
Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1 inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6 to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8 to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper, select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches” menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration printout will also show the length menu used.
•
See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.
Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
US Fanfold
Letter
Legal
Executive
A3
A4
A5
A6
10x14 Inch
Actual Size
13.6 x 11 in
8.5 x 11 in
8.5 x 14 in
7.3 x 10.5 in
11.7 x 16.5 in
8.3 x 11 2/3 in
5.8 x 8.3 in
4.1 x 5.8 in
10 x 14 in
218
Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
12x12 Inch
13.6x12 Inch
Tabloid 11x17in
JIS B5
US Folio
No. 10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
C6 Envelope
ISO B5
Actual Size
12 x 12 in
13.6 x 12 in
11 x 17 in
7.2 x 10.1 in
8.5 x 13 in
4.1 x 9.5 in
4.3 x 8.7 in
6.4 x 9 in
4.5 x 6.4 in
6.9 x 9.8 in
NOTE: When host jobs have page sizes that do not match the Paper Size parameter, the printer will behave based on the Paper Size Fault, Clip
Page, and Move to TOF parameters.
Paper Size Fault
If a page is sent to the printer with dimensions that do not match the printer, then the following will happen based on the Paper Size Fault menu selected.
•
Ignore (factory default). The page will print and the paper size length will be ignored. However, the width will be clipped according to the front panel width setting.
•
Fault. The printer enters a fault state and goes offline. The user will need to either clear the fault and continue, or load new media and change the
Paper Size menu selection. Once the printer is back online, printing will resume.
Clip Page
This menu defines the action when a page is sent to the printer with a length that is longer than the selected paper size length.
•
Enable (factory default). The page will be clipped at the paper size length.
In cases where the sent page is longer than the paper size length, the
“Move to TOF” menu setting has no effect since the page is clipped at the
TOF position.
•
Disable. The page will not be clipped and printing continues on the next page. The action taken by the printer when printing of the page completes is determined by the Move to TOF menu.
NOTE: Page clipping at paper size width is always enabled to protect against printing on the platen.
219
Chapter 4
EMULATION Menu
Move to TOF
When the page length given does not match the printer, the printer driver will have to determine how the TOF is kept relative to each page printed. The following menu options are available through the front panel and the driver:
•
Disable. Only when the FF key is pressed.
•
At End of Job. After the Current Job.
•
At End of Page (factory default). After each Page Printed.
Gray Adjust
This menu adjusts the darkness of the gray elements on the page by gradually reducing or increasing the amount of dots that are placed in the halftone patterns. Pure white and black colors are not affected by setting.
The menu ranges from -10 to +10. The default value is 0.
-10
All
White
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
Default
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
All
Black
220
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
PRINTER
CONTROL
ZTP
SETTINGS
4
ZTP Function
ZTP TearDistance
ZTP Data Time
ZTP Wait Time
ZTP Platen Open
Ribbon End
Point
Darker +6
Darker +5
Darker +4
Darker +3
Darker +2
Darker +1
Normal*
Lighter -1
Lighter -2
Lighter -3
Lighter -4
Lighter -5
Lighter -6
Lighter -7
Lighter -8
Lighter -9
Lighter -10
Open Platen
@BOF
Disable*
Enable
Bar Code
Quality
3
Dark*
Draft
* Factory Default
1
2
Not available in LG or PCL-II
3
4
Available for Pedestal printers only.
Not available when Postscript/PDF is active.
5
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
Availability based on Firmware type.
Tear Bar
Dist.
2
7.15 inches*
(4.5 – 15.5)
View
Function
Disable*
Enable
Unidirectional
Disable*
Enable
Display
Language
English*
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
1
Simp. Chinese
5
Trad. Chinese
5
Korean
5
Panel
Display
Ribbon Life*
Configuration
IP Address
Accented
Char
1
Standard*
Tall
221
Chapter 4
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
ZTP SETTINGS
Refer to the “ZTP SETTINGS” menu section in Appendix D, page 357. This
menu only appears for Zero Tear Pedestal printers.
Ribbon End Point
This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. The range of values are as follows:
•
Normal (factory default)
•
Darker +1 through Darker +6
•
Lighter -1 through Lighter -10
NOTE: This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the new end point.
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter, you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between perforations.
Bar Code Quality
Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations, except IPDS.
(See “IPDS Emulation” on page 197 to set the bar code quality for IPDS.)
•
Dark (factory default). Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72.
•
Draft. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72.
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance)
Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position. For printers using the top paper exit, the default (7.15 inches) is used. You can specify 4.5 to
15.5 inches in .01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and form design.
222
View Function
•
Disable (factory default for pedestal and tabletop printers). The View key functionality is Eject only. When the View key is pressed the paper is ejected based on the value of the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When the key is pressed again the top of the next available form moves to the print station. This movement can be either forward or backward depending on the currently set form length.
•
Enable (factory default for cabinet printers). Enables the View Function in addition to the Eject. When the key is pressed for a short period of time
(less than 1/2 second) the functionality is View. The paper moves from the print station to the tractor area for viewing. When the key is pressed again the paper moves back to the print station. When the key is pressed for a longer period of time (more than 1/2 second) the functionality is Eject.
When the View key is pressed the paper is ejected based on the value of the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When the key is pressed again the top of the next available form is moved to the print station. This movement can be either forward or backward depending on the currently set form length.
NOTE: Default setting is Enable for Indian language printers.
Unidirectional
The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only
(unidirectional).
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will print all data in both directions of the shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher printing speed.
•
Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle sweep (unidirectional printing). Although enabling this feature reduces print speed, it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces cleaner, sharper barcodes and text.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Simp. Chinese,
Trad. Chinese, or Korean. The factory default is English.
NOTE: Simp. Chinese, Trad. Chinese, and/or Korean are not available on all firmware versions.
Panel Display
This menu allows the user to customize the type of information that will display on the panel LCD when the printer is in online mode.
•
Ribbon Life (factory default). The LCD displays the ribbon life for the current cartridge installed.
•
Configuration. The LCD displays the configuration that was last loaded.
223
Chapter 4
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
•
IP Address. The LCD displays the printer IP Address for networked printers.
Accented Char
Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall. See Figure 24
for an example. Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer to back up during printing.
Standard
Tall
Figure 24. Accented Characters
224
ADVANCED USER Menu
ADVANCED
USER
* = Factory Default
1
If installed
2
Not available in PCL-II
3
Not available in LG or PCL-II
4
Available for OpenPrint products only.
5
For 1000 LPM models only.
6
For H-Series printers only.
7
For cabinet models, the default is 15 minutes.
SURE SCAN
4
PTX_SETUP
Option
2
Setup Parse
Enable*
Ignore
Disable
Setup SFCC
21h*
(1-FF hex)
Hex Dump
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Power-up
State
Online*
Offline
Downloaded
Fonts
3
PMD Fault
Char Operations
Delete frm Flash
Load from Flash
Save to Flash
Delete from RAM
Ld Char at Pwrup
Disable*
Enable
Set Operations
Delete frm Flash
Load from Flash
Save to Flash
Delete from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Download
6
Save to Flash
Delete DL Font.
Enable*
Disable
Power
Stacker
Enable*
Disable
1
Auto
Elevator
Enable*
Disable
1
Auto
Locking
Disable*
Enable
Shuttle
Timeout
5 Seconds*
1-60 Seconds
Slow Paper
Slew
Disable*
Enable
Alarm
On*
Cont. Beep
Off
Main File
System
Overwrite Files
Enable*
Disable
View File List
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Flash Reclaimable
Copy to SD
1
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
Power Saver
Time
7
Pwr Save
Control
Instant
5 seconds
10 seconds
15 seconds *
30 seconds
Enable*
Disable
1 minute – 60 minutes
SD File
System
1
Overwrite Files
Enable*
Disable
View SD Files
Delete SD Files
SD Flash Avail.
Copy From SD
Print File List
Erase QCMC
Update QCMC
Cancel
Key
Disable
Enable*
Set
Sharing
3
Disable*
Enable
225
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
ADVANCED
USER
(continued from
* = Factory Default
1
2
If installed
3
4
Not available in PCL-II
Not available in LG or PCL-II
5
Available for OpenPrint products only.
For 1000 LPM models only.
6
For H-Series printers only.
Rcv. Status
Port
Automatic*
Serial
Ret. Status
Port
Automatic*
Disable
E-NET Data Port
Serial
E-NET Stat Port
USB
IEEE 1284
RBN Low
Warn @
Under 2%*
Under 5%
Under 10%
Under 20%
Under 30%
RBN Low
Action
Warn & Continue*
Warn & Pause
Set Lock
Key
RBN End
Action
Ignore RBN End*
Stop At RBN End
Job Sel/
Typeface
6
Job-Select On*
Typeface On
Energy
5
Standard*
PowerPrint
Hist. Log
6
2*
Intensity
0-20
Disp.
OCR Font
Density
120 DPI*
180 DPI
240 DPI
226
SURE SCAN Submenu
SURE SCAN
1, 2
SURE SCAN Submenu
NOTE: Available for OpenPrint products only. For OpenPrint P8000
Standard Postscript/PDF and OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF firmware, the SURE SCAN menu is under the Advanced User menu
* = Factory Default
1
Available for OpenPrint products only.
2
Available when Postscript/PDF is selected as the Active Emulation on OpenPrint P8000 products.
3
Display menu only.
Optimize
Barcode
Yes*
Test
No
Alignment
Left
Center*
Right
Hor. Quiet
Zone
0.20 Inch*
(0.00 to 0.99 inch)
Ver. Erase
Zone
Quiet Zone
Fault
0.00 Inch*
(0.00 to 0.99 inch)
Enable*
Disable
Update
Embedded Only*
Always
Barcodes On
Page
Auto*
1, 2,...,20
Bcodes
Optimized
3 xxxxxx
2
Optimize Barcode
Defines whether the barcode optimization feature is active.
•
Yes (factory default). Activates the barcode optimization feature.
•
No. Deactivates the barcode optimization feature.
•
Test. Boxes will print around all barcodes that are detected and replaced.
This provides a simple method to confirm that the software correctly detects and replaces all the barcodes on any given form.
227
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Alignment
Defines how the optimized replacement barcode will be positioned with regard to the original barcode position if no obstacles exist to this placement.
It defines the first attempted position of the replacement barcode. If the first attempted position causes a replacement barcode to interfere with any other form elements (text, graphics, or dots), the replacement barcode automatically adjusts away from these interfering elements until requested horizontal quiet zones are observed. Selections for this menu are as follows:
•
Left. The first attempted position of the leftmost bar of the replacement barcode will be the same position as the leftmost bar of the original barcode. For instance, if the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode, it will be placed as follows:
Replacement Barcode
228
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the replacement barcode will begin at the left edge of the original barcode and expand beyond the right edge.
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
SURE SCAN Submenu
Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots) immediately to the right of the original barcode can force this first attempted placement to be modified.
The replacement barcode will shift left to avoid obstacles on the right provided that there are also no obstacles on the left.
Replacement Barcode
Here is an
Quiet Zone obstacle
Distance
(text)
(picket)
Original Barcode
•
Center (factory default). The first attempted position of the center bar of the replacement barcode will be the same position as the center bar of the original barcode.
If the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode, it will be replaced as follows:
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is longer than the original barcode, it will still be centered, but it will extend beyond the end of the original barcode on both the left and the right.
229
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If form elements interfere with this placement on the right or the left, the barcode will automatically adjust away from these obstacles. Form obstacles may force a center-aligned barcode to look left or right aligned.
For instance, in the below picture, a center-aligned barcode has text 0.2 inches away from the right edge of the original barcode. With a horizontal quiet zone of 0.2 inches, the resulting replacement barcode position is exactly the same regardless of whether center, right, or left alignment is chosen. Regardless of the first attempted position, the barcode will need to shift to the left until the horizontal quiet zone can be observed.
Replacement Barcode
Here is an
Quiet Zone
Distance obstacle
(text)
(picket)
Original Barcode
230
SURE SCAN Submenu
•
Right. The first attempted position of the rightmost bar of the replacement barcode will be the same position as the rightmost bar of the original barcode.
For instance, if the replacement barcode is shorter than the original barcode it will be placed as follows:
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the replacement barcode will end at the right edge of the original barcode and extend past the left edge. Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots) immediately to the left of the original barcode, however, can force this first attempted placement to be modified. The replacement barcode will shift right to avoid obstacles on the left provided that there are also no obstacles on the right.
231
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Hor. Quiet Zone
This menu defines the quiet zones (empty areas) width before and after the start/stop codes regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. When positioning the barcode, the quiet zone is taken into account when detecting collisions with other elements (dots) on the form. If one of the horizontal quiet zones is violated, the barcode will automatically shift to the left or right (for picket fence orientation) or up or down (for ladder orientation) to remove the quiet zone violation.
The width of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch increments. The default is 0.20 inches. This feature ensures that the replacement barcodes will be properly scanned.
Quiet Zone distance
(picket)
Barcodes are automatically adjusted away from text (or other obstacles on the form) until the Hor. Quiet
Zone distance is met.
Quiet Zone distance
(ladder)
232
SURE SCAN Submenu
Ver. Erase Zone
This menu defines the area above and below the bars that will be erased, regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. It is used when the barcode has extraneous data beyond the bars that need to be deleted as it is being replaced.
The height of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch increments. The default is 0 inches (no empty space). This feature can be used to remove special attributes remainders of the original barcode such as a guard bar or line that borders the top and bottom of the bars. It can also be used to erase the original PDF if the user wants to force all PDFs to be
replaced (see Update PDF on page 234). The PDF occupies more than 1/6 of
an inch.
Vertical Erase Distance
Vertical Erase Distance
Erase
Area
(picket)
Vertical Erase Distance
Erase
Area
(ladder)
Quiet Zone Fault
This menu defines whether a fault must be reported on the front panel LCD if the BCDOPT feature cannot print the replacement barcode without violating the quiet zone as defined in the “Hor. Quiet Zone” menu, where the width of the replacement barcode plus quiet zones is too large to fit the available white space on the page.
•
Enable (factory default). If this fault occurs, reduce the quiet zone to see if the barcode fits.
•
Disable. Quiet zone violations are not reported, but adjacent page elements could be drawn too close to replacement barcodes and possibly overlap.
233
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Update PDF
There are two distinct cases with barcode PDFs. In the first case, the PDF is partially embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the
PDF. In the second case, the PDF is printed entirely above or below the barcode and is not disturbed by the barcode replacement.
Whenever the PDF is embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the PDF, the embedded PDF will be automatically detected and replaced. An area surrounding the barcode will be erased to remove the portions of the former PDF that extended beyond the bounds of the original barcode. The erase area is shown in the figure below. Since embedded PDFs are automatically replaced, the Update PDF menu option has no effect on this type of PDF.
1/6 ”
1/6 ”
When the PDF is printed above or below the barcode, the behavior will depend on the Update PDF menu setting.
•
Embedded Only (factory default). Embedded PDFs will not be replaced.
This allows the user to keep the present PDF data and its font, etc.
•
Always. PDFs will always reprint. For instance, since the original PDF will not be centered with respect to the replaced barcode, the user may want to always replace the PDF. When set to Always, an extra 1/6” is erased to remove the original PDF. If the original PDF is not fully erased, it is up to the user to increase the Ver. Erase Zone setting such that the original
PDF will be completely erased prior to the replacement being printed.
1/6 ”
Erase
Area
234
SURE SCAN Submenu
Barcodes on Page
This setting defines the number of barcodes that must be detected on the form. If the value is set to “Auto” (factory default), no particular number of barcodes are required to be detected. If the value is set to a number between
1 to 20, then the number of barcodes set is required to be detected on each form. If the printer detects fewer barcodes than the value set, the fault “x/y
BARCODES / Not Found” is declared. x represents the number of barcodes not found, and y represents the Barcodes on Page value. Printing will not continue until the user clears this fault.
Bcodes Optimized
This is a display menu that continuously counts the number of barcodes that have been optimized since power-up. This statistic only resets to zero when the printer is powered off. This menu can be used as a diagnostic to check the number of barcodes optimized over a period of time or over a batch file.
PTX_SETUP Option
Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command and functions.
•
Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command.
•
Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command. Valid hex values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the
“!” character.
Hex Dump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems. The options include:
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable
Figure 2 on page 293. shows a hex dump sample.
Power-Up State
•
Online (factory default). The printer powers up in the online state.
•
Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
235
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Downloaded Fonts
Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the current character set with a different character in the same font.
The Downloaded Fonts menu applies to both LP+ Bitmaps and IGP Block downloaded characters. For example, performing a Delete from Flash option deletes both Bitmap and Block downloaded characters from flash memory.
•
Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character from RAM.
•
Ld Char at Pwrup. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at power up.
•
Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a character set from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a character set from RAM.
•
Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set at power up.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
•
DBCS Download. Allows you to save and delete downloadable DBCS characters from flash.
•
Save to Flash. Saves the downloaded characters from the DRAM to
FLASH memory. These characters can be automatically reloaded when the printer powers on. The saved file name is “dbcsdwn”. The characters need to be in the DRAM prior to saving into FLASH memory by using any download commands.
•
Delete DL. Font. Deletes the “dbcsdwn” file. The downloaded characters will no longer reside in FLASH memory on subsequent powerups.
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault
•
Enable (factory default). In the event of a paper jam, an audible alarm beeps, “CLEAR PAPER JAM” appears on the message display, and the printer stops printing.
•
Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.
CAUTION
Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print, possibly causing damage to the printer.
Power Stacker
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker
(provided this option is installed).
236
SURE SCAN Submenu
Auto Elevator
This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed.
The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises the stacker as the printed paper stack grows. If the printer has been printing for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in the paper stack, the stacker raises itself 1/4 inch automatically.
•
Enable (factory default). The automatic elevator on the power stacker operates normally.
•
Disable. The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes and is entirely dependent on the sensor. Disable is used with extremely high-quality print jobs that take a long time to print.
Auto Locking
•
Disable (factory default). The ENTER key must be locked manually.
•
Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after the last front panel key press.
Main File System
The Main File System refers to the flash resident on the P8000 controller.
•
Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent flash files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function.
•
View File List. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press the ENTER key to go into the submenu. Then press the UP or DOWN keys to view the different file names and size.
•
Delete Files. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to delete. Pressing the
ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control panel.
•
Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into the main file system.
•
Flash Reclaimable. The amount of flash marked deleted, but cannot be used until the Optimize&Reboot operation is performed.
•
Copy To SD. If the SD card is inserted, the section will allow the user to copy selected files from the main file system to the SD card (root directory).
•
Optimize&Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files within the main file system. After pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot.
NOTE: When the Optimize&Reboot option is executed, the message,
“Optimizing Flash Files” does not display before printer rebooting takes place.
•
Print File List. Prints a summary of the flash files stored in flash memory and several statistics on Main File System usage.
IMPORTANT
Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either back online or offline.
237
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
SD File System
The SD File System menu appears if an SD card is inserted in the printer before power-up. The SD File System applies only the SD card’s root directory.
IMPORTANT
If you remove or insert the SD card after the printer is powered on, an error will occur.
•
Overwrite Files. Prevents SD files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function.
•
View SD Files. Displays the list of files on the SD card (root directory).
Press the ENTER key to go into the submenu, then press the UP or
DOWN keys to view the different SD file names and size.
•
Delete SD Files. Displays the list of SD files on the SD card (root directory). Press the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to delete. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control panel.
•
SD Flash Avail. The amount of SD memory available for the user to save or download files into the SD card.
•
Copy From SD. Copies selected files from the SD card (root directory) to the Main File System.
•
Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored on the SD card (root directory) and several statistics on the SD File System usage.
•
Update QCMC. This menu can be used to update the configuration within the QCMC image stored on the SD card (see Appendix E, “Quick Change
Memory Cartridge”).
•
Erase QCMC. This menu can be used to erase the QCMC image stored on the SD card (see Appendix E, “Quick Change Memory Cartridge”).
Set Sharing
This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP+ protocol and the active IGP emulation.
Changing characters sets in LP+ causes the active IGP to change to the same character set if the selected set exists in IGP. If the active IGP has no access to the selected set, no changes are made. Selecting a new character set in the active IGP causes the LP+ to change to the same character set if the selected character set exists in the active LP+ protocol. Not all sets are shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets. As a result, selecting a set in the Standard group of LP+ or IGP emulation may or may not cause the other emulation to have the same set.
NOTE: The Set Sharing front panel option has no effect on the LP+ build.
The option only applies to the builds with IGP.
This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
Shuttle Timeout
The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received. If your host is slow, setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts.
238
Slow Paper Slew
•
Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum speed.
•
Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that certain forms will stack neatly.
Alarm
•
On (factory default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault occurs, such as a paper jam.
•
Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs, which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
•
Off. No audible alarm will sound.
Power Saver Time
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When Instant is chosen, the printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle properly. The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle timeout value which can be set in the menu.
NOTE: Power Saver Mode will not be shown on the control panel even though the function still exists. Sending a print job to the printer will turn off Power Saver mode.
Pwr Save Control
Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save mode.
•
Enable (factory default). Allows you to enable the Power Save mode.
•
Disable. Allows you to disable the Power Save mode.
Cancel Key
•
Disable
•
Enable (factory default). The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print buffer without printing any of the data.
Rcv. Status Port
This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status command.
•
Automatic (factory default). When selected, the status command is sent to the printer with the print data through the active host interface.
•
Serial. When selected, the status command is sent to the printer through the serial interface regardless of the active host interface.
239
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Ret. Status Port
This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS for PGL) to send the status data back to the Host.
The options are Automatic (factory default), Serial, USB, E-NET Stat Port,
IEEE 1284, Disable, and E-NET Data Port.
Set Lock Key
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER key or any key combinations which are already used for another function.
There is no limit to how many keys you can select.
To set the new lock key, follow these steps:
1.
Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads
“Set Lock Key” (follow the menu structure on page 225).
2.
Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3.
Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key. Make sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4.
If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key again.” If the selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to step 2 and start over.
5.
Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the display will read
“Verification failed.” Start over at step 2.
6.
After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the ONLINE key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on.
Job Sel/Typeface
NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
This option allows the user to change the printer’s active configuration or typeface in Offline mode.
•
Job-Select On (factory default). Allows the user to change the printer’s active configuration.
•
Typeface On. Allows the user to change the printer’s typeface.
Print Hist. Log
NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
Checks the status of user downloaded font files in the build.
240
OCR Font Density
Determines the horizontal print density for OCR-A and OCR-B fonts. A higher density will print higher quality OCR fonts at the cost of a lower print speed.
The vertical density is always 144 DPI.
•
120 DPI (Factory default)
•
180 DPI
•
240 DPI
NOTE: The maximum density for the IPDS emulation is 180 DPI.
RBN Low Warn @
This option allows the user to select the Ribbon Life value at which point the printer will declare a ribbon low condition and display the "RIBBON UNDER
XX% / Change RBN Soon" warning message. The default is Under 2%. See
“RBN Low Action” below for details of how the printer behaves once a ribbon
low condition is reached.
The values are Under 2% (factory default), Under 5%, Under 10%, Under
20%, and Under 30%.
RBN Low Action
This menu determines how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is reached.
•
Warn & Continue (factory default). Once a ribbon low condition is reached the printer beeps and displays the "RIBBON UNDER XX% /
Change RBN Soon" warning message. Printing will continue without interruption. The warning message can be cleared by pressing the
ONLINE/Clear button, however the message will persist again in two minutes. This action will continue until a ribbon out (ribbon life reaches
0%) condition occurs.
•
Warn & Pause. This setting is similar to the Warn & Continue selection with one exception. When a ribbon low condition is reached the printer will still display the "RIBBON UNDER XX%/Change RBN Soon" warning message, however the printer will stop printing. This is meant to get the user’s attention. To resume printing the user must press the ONLINE/
Clear key.
NOTE: Printing will only stop on the first occurrence of a ribbon low condition.
Once the user clears the warning message, subsequent warnings will display the warning message but printing will continue.
RBN End Action
This menu allows the user to override the normal ribbon low warning and ribbon out conditions.
•
Stop At RBN End (factory default). When this factory default option is selected, the printer displays a warning message when a ribbon low condition is reached and display a ribbon out fault when ribbon life reaches 0%.
241
Chapter 4
ADVANCED USER Menu
•
Ignore RBN End. When this menu option is selected, it overrides the ribbon low and ribbon out conditions, i.e. no warning or fault messages is displayed and printing continues even after ribbon life reaches 0%.
However, once the ribbon life reaches an excess wear condition as indicated by the fault message "EXCESS RBN WEAR / Install New RBN", printing will stop and the user must install a new ribbon before printing can resume.
NOTE: The excess ribbon wear is set below the "Lighter -10" Ribbon End
Point setting.
Print Energy (1000 lpm only)
This menu allows the user to optimize energy or impact of the hammers when printing single or multipart forms.
•
Standard (factory default). When this factory default option is selected, the printing energy is optimized for normal jobs.
•
PowerPrint. When this option is enabled, printing is optimized for multi-part forms.
Disp. Intensity
This menu controls the intensity of the LCD display. The range is 0-20 and the default setting is 2.
242
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests Test
Width
Shift Recycle*
All E’s
E’s + TOF
All H’s
All Underlines
All Black
Shuttle Slow
Shuttle Fast
Shuttle Only
Phase Printer
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log
3
Clear Error Log
3
Adapter Test
1
Ethernet Test
6
Acoustics
2
Demo
Dice 5
Prnt Ribbon Log
Checker
Weld Patch Log
Novram Err Log
Full Width*
80 col.
Phase
Value
50*
1-2000
* = Factory Default
1
2
If Ethernet adapter is present
Not available in PCL-II or LG
3
4
5
Not available in LG
If a Feature File exists.
Values for OpenPrint P8000 HD printers.
6
If the network is enabled.
Paper Out
Dots
40 dots*
(4-76)
76 dots *,
5
(40 - 112)
5
System
Memory
128 Megabytes
Statistics
On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs
Print Strokes: xxxxxx
Print Lines: xxxxxx
11 inch Pages: xxx
Power on Pages xxx
Software
Build
SW P/N + Ver
Feature
File
4
P/N of File
Shuttle
Type xxxx
Auto
Dump
Disable*
Enable
Printer
Mgmt
243
Chapter 4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Printer Tests
These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer.
NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests.
They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual.
•
Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical compression.
•
All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's which identifies missing characters, misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/ dark character variations.
•
E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page top-of-form, which identifies paper motion or feeding problems.
•
All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters, misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.
•
All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank misalignment.
•
All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid black band.
•
Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at low speed.
•
Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at fast speed.
•
Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.
•
Phase Printer. Checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set in the factory. Run the test and check the quality. (The phase value prints on the left margin.) If the print looks too wavy, change the Phase Value parameter while the test is running. While the phase printer test runs, press the DOWN key. To change the value, press the PREV or NEXT key until the desired value displays and then press ENTER.
•
Paperout Adj.. Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting, which determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
•
Burnin Test. Reserved for factory use.
•
Print Error Log. Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults
(ribbon stall, voltage faults) are stored in the error log.
•
Clear Error Log. Clears entries in the error log.
•
Ethernet Test. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet (if present).
•
Acoustics. A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics.
•
Demo. Demonstration of various print attributes.
•
Dice 5. Pattern used to measure print density.
•
Prnt Ribbon Log. Prints log of cartridge installed in the printer.
244
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
SURE SCAN Submenu
•
Checker. For factory use. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
•
Weld Patch Log. Prints log times for ribbon starts, welds, and ribbon stops.
•
Novram Err Log. Prints detailed information about the most recent
Novram related failure that has occurred. It is useful when the front panel reports “BAD NVM” or “ILL NVM” error types. Contact the Customer
Solutions Center and provide this information if such an error occurs.
Test Width
Set this parameter to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.
Phase Value
During the Phasing Test, this value changes until printing is phased.
The range is between 1-2000.
Paper Out Dots
CAUTION
Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter.
This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation; you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
System Memory
Displays the amount of RAM installed.
Print Statistics
You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
•
On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The range is 0 to 2,386,092 hours.
•
Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.
The range is 0 to 2,386,092 hours.
•
Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes the printer has printed during normal printer operation. The range is 0 to
2,147,483,647 shuttle strokes.
•
Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print lines.
•
11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.
The range in print pages is 0 to 2,147,483,647 total inches of paper movement divided by 11.
•
Poweron Pages. The number of pages the printer has printed since power-up.
245
Chapter 4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Software Build
Displays the part number and version of the printer firmware.
Feature File
Displays the part number of the file if one has been downloaded to the printer.
Shuttle Type
Displays the type of shuttle installed, i.e. 2000s, 1500, 1000, 500, or high definition.
Auto Dump
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. When a printer get ‘E03x’ type of message on the operator panel, a dump file will be automatically created and store in flash as file
“autodbg1.dbg” or “autodbg2.dbg” in the printer file system. This file can be uploaded to the host using the PrintNet Enterprise Suite application.
Upon receipt of this file, it should be sent to Printronix Customer Support for review and evaluation.
Printer Mgmt
Refer to the Printer Mgmt menu on page 247.
246
Printer Mgmt Menu
Printer Mgmt
* = Factory Default
1
Only available if PNE Port is set to Ethernet.
PNE Port
Ethernet*
USB
Disable
Serial
Mgmt Protocol
UCP
PXML*
PNE Port
Number
1
3001*
1025 - 65535
PNE Port
Timeout
1
100 Seconds*
1-255 Seconds
Status Port
Numb
3002*
1025 - 65535
Mgmt Port
Number
3007*
1025 - 65535
PNE Port
This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to, via
Ethernet or USB. The factory default is Ethernet. If the network is not enabled, the default is Disable.
Mgmt Protocol
Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port, only one can be active at a time. This menu selects the active Management
Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The factory default is PXML.
PNE Port Number
This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PNE to connect through. The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.
PNE Port Timeout
If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period, the
PNE session closes. The factory default is 100 seconds. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds.
Status Port Numb
This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status.
The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.
Mgmt Port Number
This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to connect through. The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1025 to
65535.
247
Chapter 4
Printer Mgmt Menu
248
5
Interfaces
Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time (see “Auto
Switching Submenu” on page 94).
IMPORTANT
To comply with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulatory requirements all electrical signal interface cables connected to this printer must be of a minimal quality level, be of the correct length, and be properly installed.
The RS-232 port and parallel port interface cables must meet the following specifications:
•
The cable design must be double shielded with a copper braid over an aluminum mylar foil and not just a conductive foil spiral wrapped around a drain wire.
•
The shield must terminate coaxially (360 degrees) to a metal connector housing and not be terminated by just a simple wire lead.
•
The cable length, including connectors, must be 3 meters or less.
•
The cable connector anchor screws must be securely seated into the printer receptor hardware.
For reference purposes only, two specific Centronics parallel port cables that have been tested and found to comply with these requirements are Belkin
®
part number F2A046-10 and Primelogic
®
part number PLU 2823224. Other electrically equivalent cables are acceptable.
This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.
Standard Host Interfaces:
•
High Speed Serial Port (RS-232)
•
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
249
Chapter 5
Overview
Optional Host Interfaces:
•
Centronics Parallel
•
IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional
•
Ethernet 10/100BaseT
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces.
Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection
Serial Port
(RS-232)
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
USB 2.0
Debug Port
Ethernet
10/100 BaseT
Figure 1. Cabinet Model Interface Connectors
Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection
Serial Port (RS-232)
5 4 3 2 1
9
8
7 6
USB 2.0
Ethernet
10/100 BaseT
Debug Port
Figure 2. Pedestal Model Interface Connectors
250
RS-232 Serial Interface
NOTE: The RS-232 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA-232-E and
EIA-422-B.
The RS-232 serial interface enables the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 baud rates are available.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232.
Table 1. Standard 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 lpm Models
RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal
Receive Data (RD)
Clear To Send (CTS)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 8
5
6
Pin Signal
3 Transmit Status & Control
Data (TD)
Request To Send (RTS)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
4
20
Pin Signal
2 Chassis Ground
Signal Ground
Pin
1
7
Table 2. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal
Receive Data (RD)
Clear To Send (CTS)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 1
8
6
Pin Signal
2 Transmit Status & Control
Data (TD)
Request To Send (RTS)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
7
4
Pin Signal
3 Chassis/Signal Ground
Pin
5
251
Chapter 5
USB
Receive Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Transmit Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a ready condition.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to configuration.
USB
Menus
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) port is part of Auto Switching and is active when the Host Interface menu is set to Auto Switching. It can also be selected as the only Host Interface under the Host Interface menu by selecting USB.
A top level USB Port menu with two submenus is also available:
•
Buffer Size in K. The input buffer size used by the USB port. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 16.
•
Timeout. The Hotport Timeout value used to determine when the port is inactive. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
252
Centronics Parallel Interface
Table 3. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal
DATA LINE 1
Return
DATA LINE 2
Return
DATA LINE 3
Return
DATA LINE 4
Return
DATA LINE 5
Return
DATA LINE 6
Return
DATA LINE 7
Return
DATA LINE 8
Return
DATA STROBE
Return
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
PRIME
Return
Pin
8
26
9
27
6
24
7
25
4
22
5
23
2
20
3
21
1
19
15
29
31
30
Signal
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
ONLINE
Return
FAULT
Return
PAPER EMPTY
Return
BUSY
Return
Pin
32
29
12
28
10
28
13
28
11
29
Signal
CHASSIS GROUND
GROUND
Spares
No Connection
+5 Volts
Pin
17
30
14
34,35,
36
18
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
253
Chapter 5
Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu (see
Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the ONLINE key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data.
Prime. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start (printer is reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault. A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault.
254
Compatibility Mode
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
The 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 4).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data lines.
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this, the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines. (Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines, and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the host will take control of the data transfer.
255
Chapter 5
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
Signals
Table 4 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the
1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
Pin
Host
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Host/Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Host
Source of Data
Table 4. 1284 Signals
Type of Mode
Printer
Compatible Nibble
nStrobe
Data 1 (LSB)
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8 (MSB) nAck
Busy
PError
Select nAutoFd
Not Defined
HostClk
PtrClk
PtrBusy
AckDataReq
Xflag
Host Busy
Logic Grid
Chassis Grid
Peripheral Logic High
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
Signal Ground (Data 1)
Signal Ground (Data 2)
Signal Ground (Data 3)
Signal Ground (Data 4)
Signal Ground (Data 5)
Signal Ground (Data 6)
Byte
Host/Clk
PtrClk
PtrBusy
AckDataReq
Xflag
HostAck
256
Signals
29
30
31
32
26
27
28
33
34
35
36
Pin
Host
Printer
Host
Table 4. 1284 Signals (continued)
Type of Mode
Source of Data
Compatible Nibble Byte
Signal Ground (Data 7)
Signal Ground (Data 8)
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit) nInit
NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail
Not Defined
Not Defined
Not Defined nSelectIn 1284 Active 1284 Active
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.
When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble mode, signal is set high. If Byte mode, signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrup. Driven by the printer. A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is on line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility mode idle phase.
257
Chapter 5
Ethernet
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit —Resets init interface from the host.
Ethernet
Refer to the Integrated Network Interface User’s Manual for detailed information on the ethernet interface.
258
6
Reprogramming the
Security Key
Reprogramming the Security Key
The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a
Software Program Exchange (SPX) module. The SPX is an intelligent module that plugs into the debug port on the back of the P8000. The SPX is used only once; it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a security key. This allows the end user or a service technician to enable features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install a new security key on the controller board.
The SPX is used at power-up only and is not left in the printer during normal operation. Because it is a single-use disposable item the user is not required to return it to the vendor or manufacturer.
How to Program the Security Key
1.
Power off the printer.
2.
On cabinet models, open the rear door. On pedestal models, refer to
Figure 1 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer.
3.
Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown.
259
Chapter 6
Reprogramming the Security Key
A
Debug Port
SPX
A
260
Figure 1. Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port
4.
Power on the printer. The printer will begin its boot-up sequence.
5.
When the printer detects a valid SPX, the control panel displays:
“NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER”
NOTE: If an error message displays, find the message in the Message List in
Chapter 8 and follow the troubleshooting instructions.
6.
Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence. The display will read:
“PROGRAMMING. PLEASE WAIT.”
7.
When the security key is reprogrammed, the display will read:
“UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX
Downld code if needed”
8.
Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer.
9.
Press the ENTER key. The printer will reboot itself and you may resume normal printing.
10. You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature.
11. You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features that have been added or enabled.
7
Downloading Firmware
There is 256 MB of FLASH memory on the controller board. The printer firmware which includes printer control languages (the “emulations”), the engine control, and printer operating system software are loaded into FLASH memory at the factory, but there are occasions when you may have to load this software:
•
Firmware upgrade to a newer level
•
Changing to a different firmware (emulation) type
•
Replacing a controller or reloading firmware if FLASH becomes corrupt.
Different firmware types may be included on a CD-ROM for printer upgrades.
The target firmware type should be copied to a computer’s hard disk. From there, you can employ one of the various download methods presented in this section. Downloading firmware can be accomplished through any host IO installed on the printer, but may not be valid for all methods.
NOTE: The target firmware must be consistent with the options present in the controller Security Key. Otherwise, the firmware download will be prevented.
With exception to the manual two-key and manual three-key powerup sequences, downloading new firmware does not require the user to put the printer into any special mode. Rather, most downloading methods are employed when the printer is ONLINE and ready to receive data. This makes the download procedure easy.
FLASH is used to store the firmware, but it also contains a file system that holds System and User Flash Files. User Flash Files consist of downloaded fonts, logos, forms, setup files, feature files, CST files, and files that are specific to the user’s setup or application. These files are either preserved or
deleted based on the download method used as shown in Table 1 on page 262.
IMPORTANT
Regardless of download method, any saved configurations will be erased. Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have printed or saved configurations on your host computer so they can be restored after the download process is complete.
261
Chapter 7
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)
Table 1. Firmware Download Methods
Firmware Download Method File Type(s)
User FLASH
Files
Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs the network option installed, a browser, and know the IP address.
Windows Driver (any host IO). When the Windows Driver is installed, downloading firmware can be done easily through the About/Help tab.
Automatic download (any host IO). Using the
FILENAME.exe, firmware can be downloaded from a
Windows Command Prompt without having to manually put the printer into download mode.
Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key
(ADVANCE+CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer into download mode. Firmware can be loaded through any host IO port.
Manual three-key download (USB or Parallel). This three-key power-up sequence should be used in situations in which a new controller is installed, the program in FLASH is corrupt, or a different firmware type will be installed.
Firmware must be loaded via USB or parallel (if installed).
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the
PrintNet Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This is the most versatile and powerful method to upgrade printers but requires your computer can run Java™ programs.
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.exe
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.exe
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.exe
Preserved
Preserved
Preserved
Preserved
Deleted
For a detailed description, refer to the PrintNet Ethernet User's
Manual.
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)
Using firmware with an .exe extension FILENAME.exe is convenient.
However, firmware with the .exe extension may not be available in all
situations. Download methods described in Table 1 which require the .prg
extension, FILENAME.prg, is required (e.g., Windows Drivers and Web
Page).
The FILENAME.prg file can be extracted from the FILENAME.exe file by executing the command in a Windows Command Prompt session:
FILENAME<Enter>
This will extract the FILENAME.prg file in the same directory where
FILENAME.exe was executed. For example, executing 123456.exe in the directory C:\download will generate a file C:\download\123456.prg.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to copy the FILENAME.exe file to your computer’s local drive before executing commands in the Windows Command Prompt.
262
Web Page Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware with the .prg extension
FILENAME.prg.
1.
Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the
Ethernet cable is connected.
2.
Get the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the menus).
3.
Enter the printer’s IP address in your browser (e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4.
When prompted for a user name and password, enter “root” for user name and click OK.
5.
Click “System” in the Configuration box.
Figure 1. System Configuration Upgrade
6.
Click the “Upgrade” button.
263
Chapter 7
Web Page Download
7.
Browse to the directory or enter FILENAME.prg in the “File to upload” field and click “Upgrade”. A Warning message opens.
Figure 2. Uploading Firmware File for Upgrade
8.
Click “Ok” to continue. After a few minutes, you are prompted to reboot.
9.
Click “Yes”.
Figure 3. Confirm Reboot
10. Wait until the printer is finished upgrading firmware.
Figure 4. Waiting for Firmware Upgrade Completion
11. When the Web Page is redirected, the download process in complete.
264
Windows Driver Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form FILENAME.prg.
1.
Make sure the printer is powered up, in the ONLINE mode and that desired host IO cables are connected.
2.
Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the http://www.printronix.com/products/drivers.aspx website.
3.
Once the Windows Driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer driver and select Properties.
4.
Click the About/Help tab to access the software download option.
5.
Click the Firmware Update button as in Figure 5.
Figure 5. Updating Firmware
6.
Enter the full path and location to the printer software.
For example, c:\download\FILENAME.prg where c:\download is the directory where FILENAME.prg resides.
7.
Click OK to send the software to the printer. To abort this operation, click
Cancel.
8.
When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.
265
Chapter 7
Automatic Download (.exe)
Automatic Download (.exe)
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form FILENAME.exe.
The firmware can be downloaded without requiring the user to manually put the printer into download mode.
1.
Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the applicable host IO cables are connected.
2.
Navigate to the directory where the target firmware resides. If the target firmware is on the CD, insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
NOTE: The target firmware must be in the format FILENAME.exe where the
FILENAME is a six digit number with the .exe extension
(e.g., 123456.exe).
IMPORTANT
For USB connections, the Windows Driver must be installed.
3.
Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the http://www.printronix.com/ products/drivers.aspx website. During the installation, make sure to share the printer when prompted and record the “Share name”.
266
Figure 6. Selecting to Share the Printer
IMPORTANT
For USB connections, the printer must have a “Share name” established.
4.
The “Share name” will be needed when executing the FILENAME.exe command. This should be accomplished during installation, but can be verified at any time. Select the driver, right-click the mouse button and select “Printer Properties”. Click the “Sharing” tab, make sure the “Share this printer” box is checkmarked, and enter the “Share name”.
Figure 7. Setting Printer Properties Sharing Options
5.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
6.
Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
267
Chapter 7
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence
7.
Execute FILENAME.exe as follows:
Connection Type
Parallel
Serial
USB
Ethernet
Enter Command
FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1 <Enter>
mode LPT1=COM1 <Enter>
FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>
FILENAME –a –pbSharedName <Enter> where SharedName of the printer is the ‘Share name’ entered during installation.
FILENAME -n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <Enter> where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
8.
When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence
NOTE: This download method can be completed with firmware in the form of
FILENAME.prg or FILENAME.exe.
The following steps prepare the printer for download. When the printer is in the download mode, any host IO can be used to download the firmware.
1.
Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2.
Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3.
Press and hold down the ADVANCE and CANCEL keys on the printer’s control panel.
4.
Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5.
After five seconds, release the front panel keys.
The printer must power-up so this may take to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” displays on the top line of the LCD before proceeding.
6.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
7.
Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
268
8.
Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
•
“Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)” on page 270
•
“Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270
•
“Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 276
•
“Sending Firmware via Serial” on page 277
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence
NOTE: If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if flash memory is corrupt, or you want to delete all Flash User Files, you must download software using the manual three-key download method. This can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg. When the printer is in the download mode, only USB or parallel can be used to download the firmware.
1.
Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2.
Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3.
USB Download:
Press and hold down the ADVANCE, CANCEL, and DOWN control panel keys.
Parallel Download:
Press and hold down the TOF, CONFIG, and UP control panel keys.
NOTE: If the parallel option is not installed, the printer reverts to a USB download.
4.
Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5.
After five seconds, release the control panel keys.
6.
The printer must power-up so this may take up to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“DOWNLOAD MODE USB” displays on the top line of the LCD before proceeding.
7.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
8.
Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
9.
Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
•
“Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270
•
“Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 276
269
Chapter 7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
This section describes how to send the firmware data to the printer using the desired host IO.
NOTE: The three-key download sequence only allows download through
USB or Parallel.
Although the program file FILENAME.prg is used in the examples, any file with a Printronix header can be substituted in this process to download flash files.
Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)
NOTE: You will need the IP Address of the printer.
1.
Enter the following to start the LPR program: lpr -S xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -P d1prn FILENAME.prg where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the printer.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2.
The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
Sending Firmware via USB
This section explains how to download firmware through USB by remapping
LPT1 to the USB port. This can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg.
If the PC or laptop you are using is connected to a network or the Microsoft
Loopback Adapter is installed, then proceed as shown. If not, you must first
complete the section “Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter” on page 271.
1.
Remap the LPT1 port to USB by entering the following commands at the command prompt:
NET USE LPT1\\Comp_Name\Shared_Name/Persistent:YES <Enter> where
Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\Computer
Name tab
Shared_Name is the printer’s shared name found in the printer’s Properties\
Sharing tab.
2.
To check status of connection type, enter the following commands at the command prompt:
Net View \\Comp_Name <Enter> where Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\
Computer Name tab.
Now the computer system is ready to send the firmware through USB.
3.
Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
270
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
4.
Copy the file to the printer by entering these commands at the command prompt: copy /b FILENAME.prg lpt1: <Enter> where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware or
FILENAME –pb <Enter> where FILENAME.exe is the target firmware.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
5.
The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
6.
To unmap LPT1 from USB, enter the following in the command prompt:
NET USE LPT1 /DELETE<Enter>
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
Use this section if USB is required for the download when the laptop or PC is not network connected. If your laptop or PC is already network connected, go
to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270.
1.
For Windows XP:
a.
Go to the “Start” menu
b.
Select “Control Panel” c.
Open the “Add Hardware Wizard”
For Windows 7:
a.
Go to the “Start” menu
b.
Select “Control Panel”
c.
Open the “Device Manager”
271
Chapter 7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
d.
Start the “Add legacy hardware” process from the “Action” menu as
Figure 8. Adding Legacy Hardware
2.
Click “Next” in the initial “Welcome to the Add Hardware Wizard” screen.
The second screen will ask if you have already connected the hardware to your computer.
3.
Select “Yes,...hardware” and then click “Next”.
Figure 9. Hardware Connection Options
272
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
4.
Select “Add a new hardware device” (typically at the bottom of the installed hardware list) and then click “Next”.
Figure 10. Adding a New Hardware Device
5.
When asked how you would like to have the hardware installed, select the
“Advanced” option that allows you to select the hardware from a list. Then click “Next”.
Figure 11. Selecting the Advanced Installation Method
273
Chapter 7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
6.
Select “Network adaptor”, then click “Next”.
Figure 12. Selecting Network Adapter Hardware
7.
Select “Microsoft Loopback Adapter”, then click “Next”.
274
Figure 13. Selecting Microsoft Loopback Adapter as the Network Adapter Type
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
8.
Click “Next” to start installation.
Figure 14. Starting the Installation
9.
After installation is complete, click “Finish” to close the wizard.
Figure 15. Complete Hardware Installation
275
Chapter 7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
10. To verify installation, go back to the Control Panel and select “System” for
WinXP. Under the “Hardware” tab, select “Device Manager”.
For Windows 7, select “Device Manager” directly from Control Panel.
11. Select the “Network Adaptors” and expand the selection if necessary. You should see “Microsoft Loopback Adaptor” listed. Leave all default settings.
Figure 16. Utilizing the Device Manager to Verify Installation
12. Upon verification, go to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270.
Sending Firmware via Parallel
This download method can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg.
NOTE: The parallel option must be installed.
1.
Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
copy /b FILENAME.prg lpt1: <Enter> where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware or
FILENAME –pb <Enter> where FILENAME.exe is the target firmware
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2.
The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
276
Sending Firmware via Serial
Sending Firmware via Serial
Downloading firmware using serial RS-232 is not recommended due to the size of the firmware and significant wait time required to complete the process. Downloading through serial requires firmware in the form
FILENAME.prg only.
1.
Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P <Enter>
copy /b FILENAME.prg com1 <Enter> where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware.
NOTE: Some systems can only use the 9600 baud rate. The baud rate information entered in the above commands must match the Baud
Rate setting saved in the Power-Up Config.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2.
The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
277
Chapter 7
Downloading Files to the Main File System
Downloading Files to the Main File System
User Files can be downloaded into the Main File System (onboard PCB
Flash) in a various ways as discussed in this section. This section does not cover specific methods used by the emulations but rather general ways of
downloading files as shown in Table 2. Font download is discussed in a later
section.
Table 2. File Download Methods
File Download Method File Preparation
Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs to know the IP address and have a browser.
PTX_SETUP (any host IO). User can employ PTX_SETUP commands around the file data to store the file into the Main File System.
None required.
Binary (raw) data of the file is embedded within
PTX_SETUP commands.
Run cnvt2fls.exe to add the proper header to the file
Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key (ADVANCE +
CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer into download mode.
Files can then be downloaded.
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the PrintNet
Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This is the most versatile and powerful method to download files but requires your computer can run Java™ programs.
For a detailed description, refer to the PrintNet Ethernet
User's Manual.
NOTE: Depending on the file download method, the file itself may need to be modified so that when it is downloaded to the printer, the printer stores the file with the correct Main File System name and file type.
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus
Files with the one of the filename extensions below (upper or lower case) are considered system files and are not shown in the View File List or Delete Files menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the extensions shown in
Table 3. Filename Extensions Not Shown In Menus
*.bin
*.cpg
*.eng
*.fon
*.gz
Extensions
*.inf
*.lfi
*.map
*.pat
*.qsm
*.ras
*.rfv
*.sec
278
Sending Firmware via Serial
File Properties Not Shown in Menus
Files with one of the properties listed below (case sensitive) are considered system files and are not shown in the View File List within the Delete Files menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the one of the properties
Prot
Rmap
Rprg
ASIC
Rval
CRft
SORT
Table 4. File Properties Not Shown In Menus
Properties
NetC
Rfnt
Eprg
FPGA
XHEX
Rver
NGif
Rmnu
VERS
UMCA
RULE
Rsec
Web Page Download
1.
Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and the Ethernet cable is connected.
2.
Obtain the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the menus).
3.
Enter the IP address of the printer in your browser
(e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4.
Enter “root” for the user name when prompted, and click OK.
5.
Click “Printer” in the Configuration box. The following webpage will display. Click “File Management” to download the file.
279
Chapter 7
Web Page Download
Figure 17. Downloading Files using the File Management Webpage
6.
Click “Browse” to navigate the directory and find the download file, then click “Download File”.
280
Figure 18. Navigating to Download a File
Sending Firmware via Serial
A notification displays indicating that the web page will refresh upon download completion.
Figure 19. File Download Notification
PTX_SETUP Download
Use PTX_SETUP to load files into the Main File System. Refer to the
PTX_SETUP Chapter in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for details.
Example loading a font named ARIAL.TTF:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;“ARIAL.TTF”
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data.
NOTE: DO NOT add LF/FF to the end of the binary data.
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””
PTX_END
Manual Two-Key Download
1.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2.
Navigate to the directory with the target file (e.g., c:\download).
3.
Copy cnvt2fls.exe from your Starter Kit CD to the directory with the target file.
4.
Convert the file to a downloadable format using the following command at the command prompt: cnvt2fls file_name1 file_name2 file_name3 A FONT <Enter> where
•
file_name1 is the name of the file to be converted into the downloadable format.
•
file_name2 is the name of the file of the output file that will be downloaded into the printer.
281
Chapter 7
Downloading Files to the SD Card
•
file_name3 is the name of the file within the Main File System.
NOTE: The FONT parameter should only be used with fonts; otherwise, omit this parameter
Example:
cnvt2fls arial.ttf arial.dwn ARIAL.TTF A FONT <Enter>
This example creates the file “arial.dwn” that will place “ARIAL.TTF” into the
Main File System.
5.
Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
6.
The process is complete when the file successfully loads into flash memory and the printer resets.
7.
Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded, go to the ADVANCED
USER menu, in the Main File System submenu. One of the files displayed should include file_name3.
Downloading Files to the SD Card
SD files can be utilized by the printer and certain emulations such as PGL.
Since the SD file format is an industry standard, downloading files and fonts to the SD card does not require special facilities within the printer. This allows the user to copy files from their PC or laptop to the SD card as well as copy printer files on the SD card to their PC or laptop.
NOTE: The printer will only locate files stored on the root directory of the SD card. The name of the file within the SD card root directory is the name shown in the SD File System submenu.
Alternatively, users can copy files from the Main File System to the SD card by using the “Copy to SD” selection within the Main File System menu. Users can also copy files from the SD card to the Main File System by using the
“Copy from SD” selection within the SD File System menu.
PGL forms, fonts, and logos can all be read from and stored onto SD cards as described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
IMPORTANT
The SD card must be installed at the time of power-up and cannot be removed until the printer is powered off.
282
Downloading TrueType Fonts
Using TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels. You can download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into your printer. The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as www.fonts.com and www.myfonts.com.
The following sections discuss how to:
•
download TrueType fonts (page 283)
•
select and print downloaded TrueType fonts (page 285)
•
use TrueType fonts to print DBCS using UTF-8 (page 285).
IMPORTANT
Line Matrix printers use bitmap fonts for smaller characters (less than or equal to 2x2). Since TrueType fonts are scalable fonts, use these fonts for sizes greater than 2x2.
Downloading TrueType Fonts
You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
PGL Emulation (see below)
•
Adding a Font Header/Manual Two-Key Download (page 284)
•
Labeling Applications (page 285)
Once a TrueType font is downloaded, it is stored in the Main File System or
SD File System as a resident font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes it. The user can find a list of all printer resident fonts within the Main File System or SD File
System submenus under ADVANCED USER. User downloaded fonts can be deleted from these same submenus. If within the Main File System, the user is recommended to perform an Optimize & Reboot function.
PGL Emulation
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL command to the font and then sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL
FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName TrueType font name, e.g. arial.ttf
FontSize TrueType font size, e.g. file size for arial.ttf
Location The download location. By default, “DISK” represents the Main
File System (Flash), while “EMC” designates the SD card. The
PGL menu “Storage Select” can be changed to force “DISK” to store fonts and other PGL elements to the SD card.
283
Chapter 7
Using TrueType Fonts
Example:
~FONTLOAD;arial.ttf;60548;DISK
(Insert binary data of arial.ttf here.)
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate printer I/O port while the printer is online, similar to other print files.
Example: copy/b filename.ext lpt1 or LPT1
Adding a Header/Manual Two-Key Download
To download a TrueType font to the printer through the manual two-key download mode, first add a header to the font, then place the printer in
Download mode and download the font. A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable format by appending a header to the font file using the cnvt2fls.exe utility and a batch file as described in this section.
Header for Main File System
1.
Start a Command prompt window.
2.
Copy (or unzip) cnvt2fls.exe and addtthdr.bat from your Starter Kit CD to your working directory (e.g., c:\download).
3.
Copy the target TrueType font (.ttf) file to your working directory.
4.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
5.
Convert the TrueType font file .ttf (e.g., arial.ttf) to a downloadable format
.dwn with the following command: addtthdr filename <Enter> where filename is the font name without an extension
(e.g., addtthdr arial).
This creates the file arial.dwn.
6.
Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
7.
firmware FILENAME.prg.
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer resets itself.
8.
Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the ADVANCED
USER -> Main File System submenu. One of the files shown should include the original true type font name (e.g., arial.ttf).
284
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Header for SD Card
As discussed in “Downloading Files to the SD Card” on page 282, the process
to copy TrueType fonts to the SD card can be employed from a PC or laptop by copying the target font file (*.ttf) onto the SD card root directory. The SD card can then be placed in the printer and used accordingly.
Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications, such as Codesoft, Loftware, and Bartender. Contact the appropriate company for more details.
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, you can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the command as described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
To Print ASCII Characters
You can print characters from your font using the currently selected character set. You can also select a new character set using the ISET command.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
To Print All Characters
You can print all of the characters in your font using UTF-8. You must have a
UTF-8 datastream to print.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;’UTF8’
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$UTF-8 data$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
285
Chapter 7
Demo Facility
Demo Facility
To exercise the function of a Printronix printer in an environment where there is no host computer system available, you may need to execute a demo test file from the menu system. When executed, the demo test file will run through the emulations as if the host computer sent the file. Once completed, it will run the file again until terminated.
This section describes how to download, configure, execute, and terminate the demo. Demo files are treated as other User Flash Files and therefore are preserved across downloads by default.
Downloading a Demo File
1.
Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2.
Navigate to the directory with the target demo file (e.g., c:\download).
3.
Copy (or unzip) demo2fls.exe from your Starter Kit CD to the directory with the target file.
4.
Convert the file to a downloadable format with the following command at the command prompt: demo2fls file_name <Enter> where file_name is the name of the file to be converted into the downloadable format.
The output file for download replaces the file_name extension with “.fls”.
Example: demo2fls demo.txt <Enter>
This creates the file “demo.fls” that will place “demo.txt” into the Main File
System when downloaded.
5.
Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
6.
FILENAME.prg.
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer resets itself.
7.
Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the
DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. One of the printer tests shown should include file_name.
Configuring the Printer to Run a Demo File
This facility does not attempt to identify which emulation a particular demo file is designed for. The user must configure the printer for the appropriate emulation before invoking the demo. The demo will inherit all menu configuration parameters when executed. The user is responsible to properly configure the forms size, typeface, orientation, etc. This facility will not restore any configuration settings when the demo file is finished printing.
286
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Starting a Demo File
The demo file is initiated by selecting its Flash File name and pressing
ENTER within the DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. This causes the printer to go online and print the demo file. Once the demo file starts, it will repeat automatically until the demo file sequence is stopped.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT run a demo file if the printer is in the middle of another test or host job. This will cause unexpected results. Similarly, do not send host jobs when running demo tests.
Pausing a Demo File
Pause the demo by placing the printer OFFLINE (press the ONLINE button).
To resume printing, go back ONLINE.
Stopping a Demo File
Stop the demo by executing a soft reset on the printer (press the LEFT and
RIGHT keys simultaneously). This will resume normal operation.
Deleting a Demo File
Delete demo files similar to any other file in the Main File System. Once deleted, the file will no longer appear as a selection in the Printer Tests submenu.
287
Chapter 7
Demo Facility
288
8
Troubleshooting
Cleaning Requirements
Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for heavy duty printing, clean it more often.
WARNING
Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.
Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen.
Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.
Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.
Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent soap. (Dishwashing liquid works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents. Clean the windows with plain water or mild window cleaner. Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer.
289
Chapter 8
Cleaning Requirements
Ribbon
Cartridge
Interior Cleaning
Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printer. This is normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be periodically removed to avoid degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the platen and ribbon path.
Ribbon
Ribbon
Tension Knob
Tab (2)
Tractor (2)
Blue Tractor
Lock (2)
Paper Support (2)
Tab Slot (2)
Splined Shaft
Hammer Bank
Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Vertical
Position Knob
Ribbon Cartridge
Interface
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 1. Interior Printer Components
290
Interior Cleaning
To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps.
1.
Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.
2.
Open the printer cover.
3.
Fully raise the platen lever.
4.
Unload the paper.
5.
Remove the ribbon cartridge.
6.
Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path.
7.
Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover assembly, and base casting with a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush
(such as a toothbrush). Vacuum up the residue.
CAUTION
Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to avoid damage. To avoid corrosion damage, use only alcohol when cleaning the printer mechanical elements. Solutions used to clean mechanical elements must contain no water.
8.
Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.
9.
Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or ribbon lint.
10. Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol. (The platen is the thick silver bar behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated.)
CAUTION
When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle assembly.
11. Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower cabinet.
12. Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not wet) with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution. Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean, lint-free cloth.
13. Install the ribbon and load paper.
291
Chapter 8
Diagnosing Problems
Diagnosing Problems
This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal printer operation.
Bar Code Verification
The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that the bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will increase overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes, and achieve high first-time read rates. A high first-time read rate is an increasingly important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually entered data is not acceptable as a backup function. Verification also minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes.
292
Printing a Hex Dump
Printing a Hex Dump
A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent, listing all ASCII character data received from the host computer with their corresponding two-digit hexadecimal codes. Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems.
Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters are indicated by a period (.).
Figure 2 shows an example of a hex dump.
Figure 2. Hex Dump Sample
293
Chapter 8
Diagnosing Problems
The CD contains a utility called hexcode.exe. This utility can be run from a
DOS window to convert an input file into a hexadecimal equivalent. The output from this utility can then be used to compare what is received when printing a hex dump.
Usage: hexcode <input file> <output file>
Sample output: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294
Most Frequent Problems and Solutions
Problem
Poor print quality
• dark print
• light print
• light print on half of the page
• missing dots or characters
• smeared print
• wavy vertical lines
Torn or damaged forms
Loss of forms position
Lost dots (incompletely formed characters)
Horizontally or vertically misaligned character positions
Erratic character height
Vertically misaligned print
Corrective Action
•
Adjust the forms thickness lever setting. Print quality can be affected if it is too loose or too tight.
•
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too loose or too tight.
•
Make sure the ribbon threads between the hammerbank cover and ribbon mask, as shown on the ribbon path diagram on the pedestal models. Turn the ribbon cartridge knob clockwise to ensure that the ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
•
Be sure to use an approved ribbon.
•
Reset the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.
•
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the right tractor. Too high a paper tension can cause tearing of the tractor feed holes.
•
Check the paper slot for foreign material.
•
For thick, multipart forms, set the OPEN PLATEN @
BOF to enable. Refer to the Printer Control Menu in the Administrator’s Manual.
•
Set the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.
•
Lower the forms thickness lever.
•
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too loose or too tight.
•
Clear the paper path of any obstructions.
•
If problems persists, contact a service representative.
295
Chapter 8
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
If the printer displays LCD error messages such as ‘E03E DSI CXIWX”, “BAD
NVM”, or “ILL NVM”, reboot the printer (turn power on and off) and continue. If the problem persists, then invoke a diagnostic option that will capture the failure dump in a flash file that can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise
Suite and sent to Printronix Customer Support Center for analysis
This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the information. If you choose to perform this diagnostic perform the following procedure:
1.
Within the DIAGNOSTICS section, set the Auto Dump menu to Enable.
2.
When the failure happens, reboot the printer and wait for it to power up again.
3.
Within the ADVANCED USER section, go to the Main File System submenu and then to View File List.
4.
Verify that files ‘autodmp1’ or ‘autodmp2’ are present in the file list.
5.
If present, use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host computer.
6.
Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files along with the printer’s configuration printout. Refer to the PrintNet
Enterprise Suite User’s Manual on how to accomplish these tasks.
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in alphabetical order in Table 1. These error
messages are used in ASCII products.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
Operator correctable
•
Field service required
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 1.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CANCEL key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the procedures described there must be performed only by your authorized service representative.
296
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative:
1.
Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2.
If the message reappears, press the CANCEL key. If the message disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
Displayed Message
12 VOLT FAILED*
B12 ERROR: PROGRAM
MISSING*
B13 ERROR: NOT
COMPATIBLE*
B20 STATUS :00%
DOWNLOAD MODE
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
B21 STATUS: PRINTER
RESET
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE*
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS CKSUM*
Can User
Correct?
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
The power supply 12 volt output has failed.
The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
Attempting to download a program that is not compatible with the printer.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
There is no program in printer memory. Download printer firmware again.
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
Status message informing the operator that software is being downloaded. Percentage figure indicates approximate amount loaded into the printer.
Status message informing the operator that the printer is undergoing a system reset.
FLASH memory has not passed boot initialization tests.
FLASH memory has not passed boot initialization tests.
No action is required.
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
297
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
B30 STATUS:
INITIALIZING...
B50 STATUS:
PANEL CODE BAD
B51 STATUS: XX%
LOADING...
Bxx ERROR: NO
DOWNLOADER FOUND
BAD NVM CALL 1
BAD NVM CALL 2
BAD NVM CALL 3
BAD NVM CALL 4
BAD NVM CALL A x/y BARCODES /
Not Found
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
N/A
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
Status message: the printer is running its initialization routines after startup and successful memory tests.
Saved version of Panel
Code is corrupt.
Status message: printer boot-up routines are loading printer system software into flash memory and SDRAM.
No Downloader was found while downloading a file.
Printer firmware code error with the Novram module that stores configurations and statistics.
No action is required.
Reload released Firmware.
No action required.
Reload released Firmware.
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message, follow the
authorized service representative.
1
Press the ONLINE key.
Printer detects fewer barcodes than the set value for "Barcodes on
Page" menu option. x represents the number of barcodes not found, and y represents the
"Barcodes on Page" value.
298
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
BUFFER OVERRUN
CARTRIDGE AT
END POINT
Change Cart
CLEAR PAPER JAM
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
CLOSE PLATEN
COIL HOT ERR 1
COIL HOT ERR 2
COIL TEMP FAIL
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
CARTRIDGE CONNECTION
ERROR
See User Manual
No
Explanation Solution
The print buffer has overflowed on a serial interface. The printed output may contain random * (asterisk) characters. Make a configuration printout.
Integrated Print
Management System software has determined that the cartridge ribbon is out of ink.
No paper motion.
Status message: emulation software successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched. The old program is now being deleted from flash memory.
The hardware cannot communicate properly with the cartridge.
Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
Terminal Ready, and Request to Send. Set printer serial interface parameters to match those of the host.
Install a new cartridge.
Clear jam and reload paper. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
The platen lever is open.
Close the platen lever.
One or more hammer coils are overheating.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
The coil temperature was never set or the attempt to set it did not result in correct numbers.
Allow printer to cool completely, then set coil temperature. If message continues to display, contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
2.
Remove and replace the ribbon cartridge if necessary.
3.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
299
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
CARTRIDGE
INCOMPATIBLE
Use correct cart
CARTRIDGE MISSING
Install new cart
Press ONLINE
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED
Re-install Cart
CARTRIDGE/REGION
X MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
CARTRIDGE/ SHUTTLE
MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
CARTRIDGE/
TIPSIZE MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
CATASTROPHIC ERROR
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Explanation Solution
An incompatible ribbon cartridge was installed in the printer.
The ribbon cartridge is missing or installed improperly.
The ribbon cartridge is not properly positioned.
The incorrect cartridge type is being used for the printer. “X” indicates the region of the printer.
Install a cartridge designed for this printer.
1.
Make sure a ribbon cartridge is installed in the printer.
2.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
3.
Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary.
4.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
1.
Make sure a ribbon cartridge is installed in the printer.
2.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
3.
Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary.
4.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
Install Region X ribbon cartridge in the printer.
NOTE: Specify the region of the printer when ordering ribbons.
Install Standard Life Cartridge.
This message displays when an Extended Life
Cartridge is mounted on a 500 lpm printer.
The incorrect cartridge type is being used for the printer.
Fatal error in printer.
Install the correct ribbon cartridge type in the printer.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
300
Displayed Message
D50 STATUS
UPGRADING PANEL
D51 STATUS
PROGRAMMING DONE
DP FIFO Busy*
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED
DO NOT POWER OFF
Can User
Correct?
No
No
No
No
Yes
Explanation Solution
Status message: The printer is upgrading the panel, where %XX represents the percentage completed.
Status message: The printer is loading firmware, where %XX represents the percentage completed.
Status message: the printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests.
Status message: The printer is performing an operation that must be completed before you can cycle power.
There is a timing problem in the Engine Controller firmware.
No action is required.
No action is required.
No action is required.
No action is required, but do not power off the printer until the operation is complete.
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, download the emulation software again.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
301
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
E01A TYPE 0x40
E01B TYPE 0x60
E02 MACHINE CHK
E03A DSI HASH L
E03B DSI HASH S
E03C DSI BAT PL
E03D DSI BAT PS
E03E DSI CXIWX
E03F DSI CXOWX
E03G DSI ECXIWX
E03H DSI ECXOWX
E04A ISI NO TRA
E04B ISI DIRECT
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
E12 SYSTEM CALL
E13 TRACE INT
E16 ITRANS MISS
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT O BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT
See User Manual
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation Solution
An illegal or unsupported instruction was attempted in the application program.
1.
Cycle Power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message, follow the
and contact your authorized service representative.
1
302
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
E-Net Test Unavailable
ERROR OCCURRED
FLUSHING QUEUES*
ERROR NOR FLASHED
WAS
NOT CLEARED
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
No
Explanation
The ethernet did not initialize correctly.
An interim message that displays while the printer discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists.
While this message displays, the asterisk (*) rotates.
Problem programming
Boot Code.
Solution
Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
Ready” to display, then retry operation. If it still fails, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Wait. When the asterisk (*) stops rotating, a different fault message will appear: troubleshoot the final message.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Yes
ERROR: LOCKED
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n
No
ERROR: NVRAM FAILURE
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
COMPATIBLE
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
VALID
ERROR: SECURITY KEY
NOT DETECTED
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
The printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message appears, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n is the serial number of the printer’s security key.
The SPX serial number does not match the printer’s serial number and cannot be used with the printer.
The non-volatile SRAM on the controller board has failed.
The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program.
The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
The security key is not present or failed.
The printer received the complete program but the checksum did not match.
The data may have been corrupted during downloading.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Use the correct emulation software options(s) for this printer model.
There is no program in printer memory. Download the emulation.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
303
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
ERROR: WRONG OEM
ETHERNET DETECTED
ETHERNET INITIALIZING
EXCEPTION ERROR
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR
Install New RBN
EXHAUST FAN FLT
(Cabinet model only)
Can User
Correct?
No
ERROR: WRONG PRINTER
TYPE
No
N/A
No
No
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
The SPX inserted in the debug port is not intended for this model printer or this OEM.
The SPX inserted in the debug port is not intended for this model printer or this OEM.
Status message indicating that the
Network Interface Card has established connection.
Status message: the internal Network Interface
Card is processing the boot procedure. (May occur with older versions of microcode.)
An EXCEPTION
INTERRUPT has occurred.
Status message that displays when ribbon reaches end of life, whether the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled or not.
Sensor cannot detect current in fan circuit.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Install a new ribbon.
Power off the printer and remove the paper path (see
Maintenance Manual). Check that the fan cable connector is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway, and remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
304
Displayed Message
FIRMWARE ERROR*
FLASH: WAS NOT
CLEARED
FRAMING ERROR
GENERATING XX%
NAND FLASH TABLE
H00: PCI SLOT ?
See User Manual
H01: PCI J12
See User Manual
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
FLASH: CHECK RETURN
FLASH: WRITE ERROR # 2
FM HEADER ERROR*
Can User
Correct?
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
Application software tried to perform an illegal printer function or damaged memory detected on the controller board.
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
Frame Header Error.
Application software has violated header parameters.
The printed output may contain random !
(exclamation point) characters.
Contact your authorized service representative.
service representative.
service representative.
Contact your system administrator.
1
Contact your authorized
1
Contact your authorized
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Make a configuration printout.
Set printer serial interface parameters to match host configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.
No action is required.
NAND FLASH is being read and system tables are being initialized.
The controller board is not communicating with a
PCI card. This could indicate a bad PCI card, poor connection, or problem in the PCI bus.
The controller board is not communicating with the PCI card in PCI slot
J12. This could indicate a bad PCI card, poor connection, or problem in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
305
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Displayed Message
<Online, etc...>
Half Speed Mode
HAMMER COIL BAD*
#, #, #, ...etc
HAMMER DRIVER
CIRCUIT BAD*
HAMMERBANK NOT
INSTALLED*
HMR BANK FAN FLT
ILL EXT BUS ACC*
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Can User
Correct?
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Explanation Solution
Status message: The controller samples the operating temperature of key components of the print mechanism. When higher than normal temperatures are sensed, the print speed is automatically reduced by
50% and the message sent the LCD. When the components cool down, the print speed returns to
100% and the message clears.
Hammer coil # failed current test at power up.
No action is required. If the message appears often, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Driver Circuit Bad. The hammer coil count test failed.
Hammer Bank Not
Installed. Self-test routines do not detect hammer coils at printer start-up.
Sensor cannot detect current in fan circuit.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Illegal External Bus
Access. Firmware error on the controller board.
Check that fan cable is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway; remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
306
ILL NVM VALUE 5
ILL NVM VALUE 6
ILL NVM VALUE 7
ILLGL OPR ACCSS*
INITIALIZING...
LO DRV. SHORT *
LOAD PAPER
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
INTAKE FAN CHECK
INTERRUPT UNUSED
VECTOR 00
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Explanation Solution
Illegal value was stored into the Novram module.
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message, follow the
authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Illegal Operand
Accessed. Firmware error on controller board.
This message indicates the printer is beginning its initialization process.
Sensor cannot detect current in fan circuit.
No action is required.
The controller board receives an interrupt it does not understand. The problem can be created by electrical noise, by a software problem, or by a hardware problem.
Lower Driver Short.
Circuit(s) on the hammer bank or in the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground.
Printer is out of paper.
Cycle power. If the message appears, press CLEAR. If the message does not clear, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Cycle power. If this message occurred once and never again, you can ignore it. If the message reappears or appears consistently, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Load paper and press
CLEAR.
307
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
LOADING PROGRAM INTO
FLASH
NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER
NON VOLATILE MEMORY
FAILED
ONLINE
PANEL
BAD CHECKSUM
PAP BAD TABLE*
PAP FD DRVR CIR*
See Manual
PAP FIFO OVERFL*
PAP FIFO UNDRFL*
Can User
Correct?
No
No
No
No
N/A
No
No
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
Status message: the new emulation program is loading into printer RAM.
XX% indicates how much of the program has loaded.
The printer has deleted the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory.
The printer detects an
SPX installed at the debug port and the SPX is valid for the printer.
Large emulations reduce the amount of space available for saving configurations, which means that sometimes fewer than eight configurations can be saved.
Printer state message: printer is online and in communication with host.
Panel Code has a bad
Checksum.
Paper Bad Table. The paper feed process on the controller board has a corrupted table.
Paper Feed Driver
Circuit. The paper feed driver circuit on the controller board is drawing too much current.
Paper First In First Out
Overflow. Firmware error on controller board.
Paper First In First Out
Underflow. Firmware error on controller board.
No action is required.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
Reload released firmware.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
308
Displayed Message
PAP ILLGL ST*
PAP INVLD CMD*
PAP INVLD PARM*
PAPER REQUESTED
Install A4
PARITY ERROR
PLAT INV CMD*
PLAT INV PARM*
PLAT INV STATE*
PLEASE WAIT...
RESET IN PROGRESS
PRINTER HOT
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
POWER SUPPLY HOT
Can User
Correct?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
N/A
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
Paper Illegal State.
Firmware error on controller board.
Paper Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller board.
Paper Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller board.
A paper size mismatch is detected.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
The printed output may contain a random ?
(question mark) characters.
Check the paper size setting and if necessary, load new media and change the paper size menu option.
Check your printer serial interface parameter settings; if necessary, adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Platen Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller board.
Platen Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller board.
Platen Invalid State.
Firmware error on controller board.
Status message: the printer finished loading the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself.
Power supply sensors report high temperatures.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
No action is required.
1
This message indicates internal temperatures of
80° Celsius or higher
(176° Fahrenheit).
Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.
1
Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.
1
309
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE
CONTROL
No
PROCESSOR HALTED
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
PROTECTED INSTR*
PS/PDF ERROR:
CHECK ERROR
PS/PDF ERROR:
DICTIONARY ERROR
PS/PDF ERROR:
INVALID ACCESS
PS/PDF ERROR:
I/O ERROR
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
Status message: The printer is under the control of PrintNet
Enterprise (PNE) remote management software.
Real-time System
Firmware error on controller board.
Protected Instruction.
Firmware error on controller board.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected:
Type Check, Limit Check,
Range Check, or No
Current Point Defined.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected:
Dictionary Full, Dictionary
Stack Overflow, or
Dictionary Stack
Underflow.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected:
Invalid Access, Invalid
Font, or Invalid Exit.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected: I/O
Error, Invalid File Access,
Undefined File, Interrupt, or Time Out.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
310
Displayed Message
PS/PDF ERROR:
JOB ABORTED
PS/PDF ERROR:
STACK ERROR
PS/PDF ERROR:
SYNTAX ERROR
PWR SUPP VOLT *
REMOVE USED SPX
THEN PRESS ENTER
RIB INVLD CMD*
See User Manual
RIBBON STALL
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
RESTORING BOOT CODE
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job, e.g. an unsupported command or a large job which requires more DRAM to process.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected:
Stack Overflow, Stack
Underflow, Exec Stack
Overflow, or Invalid
Restore.
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to process a job. One or more of the following errors were detected:
Syntax Error, Unmatched
Mark, Undefined,
Undefined Results, or
Unknown Error.
Power Supply Voltage.
The power supply has failed.
Status message: An SPX is depleted because it has successfully reprogrammed the security key on the controller board.
Normal download initialization message.
Ribbon Invalid
Command. Firmware error on the controller board.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Check the Postscript/PDF job for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF will continue with the next job.
Replace power supply board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
No action is required.
1
The controller board does not detect ribbon movement.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, download the emulation software again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Check the ribbon path for jams. Turn the Ribbon Tension
Knob clockwise a few rotations. If necessary, install a new ribbon.
311
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
RIBBON UNDER 2%
Change RBN Soon
SD CARD ERROR
Remove SD Card
SD FILE EXISTS
Enable Overwrite
SD FILESYS FULL
Delete Files
SD FILESYS FULL
File Too Big
SD FILESYS WRITE
Check SD
SD INSERTED
Reboot Printer
SD NOT FOUND
Insert SD Card
Pwr Off Printer
SD READING
Do not Remove
SD REMOVED
Reboot Printer
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
Status message indicating the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled and ribbon ink level is 2%.
The printer has been powered up with a card in the SD slot, but the card is not functioning properly. The card could be a compact flash card or a non-supported card.
A write operation to the
SD has failed because the file already exists on the SD card and the overwriting of existing files is disabled.
The SD file system is completely full.
A write operation to the
SD has failed because the file is too big to fit in the remaining space on the SD card.
A write operation to the
SD has failed for an unknown reason.
The SD card has been inserted after the printer was already powered up.
A write operation to the
SD could not be performed because the
SD card was not detected.
The SD card is currently reading files.
The SD card has been removed after the printer was already powered up.
Install a new ribbon.
Power down, reseat card, and power up again. If error persists, power down, remove card, and try another card.
Enable overwriting of files on the SD using the overwrite files menu.
Delete files on the SD card to make space.
Delete files on the SD card to make space.
Ensure that the S
D card is inserted correctly and that the SD card is a supported SDHC card.
Turn off the printer and insert the SD card only when the printer is not powered on.
Ensure that an SD card is inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC card.
Wait until reading completes.
Turn off the printer and remove the SD card only when the printer is off.
312
Displayed Message
SD WRITE FAIL
WRITE PROTECTED
Check SD Card
SD WRITING
Do not Remove
SDSC CARD
NOT SUPPORTED
Remove SD Card
SECURITY KEY NOT
DETECTED
SF ERROR
SHUT DRVR CIR*
See User Manual
SHUTL INV CMD*
SHUTL INV PARM*
SHUTL OVR SPEED*
SHUTTLE JAM
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
SECURITY VIOLATION*
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Explanation Solution
A write operation to the
SD has failed because the SD card is write protected.
The SD card is currently writing or erasing files.
The printer has been powered up with an
SDSC card, and SDSC cards (< 4 GB) are not supported.
Security code of PAL on controller board does not match code of firmware on the controller board.
The security key is not present or has failed.
Structured Field Error.
Application software has violated structured data field parameters.
The shuttle driver circuit on the controller board is drawing too much current.
Shuttle Invalid
Command. Firmware error on controller board.
Shuttle Invalid
Parameter. Firmware error on controller board.
The shuttle is oscillating too rapidly.
Ensure that the write protect tab on the SD card is not active. If the write protect tab is not active, use another SD card.
Wait until the write or erase operation completes.
Power down, remove SD card, and insert an SDHC card in the printer.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Not a printer problem. Have the system administrator correct applications data or configuration.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
No shuttle movement or shuttle moving at the wrong speed.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Check for obstruction to shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or platen lever closed too tightly.
If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.
1
313
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
SHUTTLE STALL
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT
SUPPORTED*
SOFTWARE ERROR*
CYCLE POWER
SPX FOUND, ERROR:
KEY NOT DETECTED
SPX NOT NEEDED
OPTIONS ENABLED
STACKER FAULT
STACKER FULL
STACKER JAM
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
The shuttle is not moving.
Set the platen lever to match the thickness of paper, but not too tightly. Check and adjust the platen gap. Inspect the ribbon mask for deformation that snags and interferes with shuttle movement. If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
The shuttle type was not detected at power-up or the shuttle installed in the printer is not supported by the firmware.
Application software tried to perform illegal printer function, or damaged logic circuits found on controller board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
The controller board does not have a security key.
The user has attempted to use the SPX to turn on printer options that are already enabled.
Stacker is not functioning correctly.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Status message: the power paper stacker is full of paper.
This message is triggered if there is paper inside the throat of the stacker elevator, but the elevator is not moving.
Check for obstructions in the stacker area. If fault persists, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Unload the stacker. If fault persists, contact your authorized service representative.
1
1. Open the cabinet rear door and check for obstructions preventing elevator movement. Remove any obstructions.
2. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
314
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation Solution
TCB CORRUPTED*
TCP PORT BUSY
No
Yes
Task Control Block
Corrupted. Firmware error on controller board.
Error message reported by the Printer Manager when ethernet interface option is installed. The network address given in the printer properties was reached, but the printer port is busy.
Upper Driver Short.
Hammer driver circuits on the boards shorted to ground.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Refer to the Printronix P8000
Maintenance Manual.
UP DRV. SHORT* No
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX
Downld code if needed
No Status message: An SPX has successfully upgraded the security key on the controller board.
The cartridge weld was not detected.
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Remove SPX and download code if needed.
WELD NOT DETECT
See User Manual
WELD SNSR ERROR
See User Manual
No
No The cartridge sensor could not be calibrated.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Make sure your cartridge is properly seated.
2.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
WELD SNSR MISSING
See User Manual
Yes The incorrect cartridge type is being used for the printer.
1.
Make sure the correct ribbon cartridge type is installed.
2.
Make sure the cartridge is properly seated.
3.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
XXXX
CHECKING PATTERN
XXXX
MEMORY FAILURE
XXXX
WRITING PATTERN
No
No
No
Running power on memory test.
Memory in bank xxx has failed. Power on memory test.
Running power on memory test.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
No action is required.
1
1
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message still displays, then contact your authorized service representative.
315
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 2. Many of the error messages for
H-Series have a numerical prefix to help the user find the description within this manual.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
Operator correctable
•
Field service required
For the operator correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 2.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator, and resume printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the procedures described there must be performed only by your authorized service representative.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative:
1.
Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2.
If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
316
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
000:SHUTTLE TYPE
NOT SUPPORTED*
104:POWER SUPPLY
HOT
105:PRINTER HOT
401:BUFFER
OVERRUN
402:CLEAR PAPER
JAM
403:CLOSE PLATEN Yes
409:FRAMING ERROR Yes
410:LOAD PAPER
411:PARITY ERROR
Can User
Correct?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
The shuttle type was not detected at power-up or the shuttle installed in the printer is not supported by the firmware.
Power supply sensors report high temperatures.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
This message indicates internal temperatures of 80°
Celsius or higher (176°
Fahrenheit).
The print buffer has overflowed on a serial interface. The printed output may contain random *
(asterisk) characters. Make a configuration printout.
No paper motion.
The platen lever is open.
The printed output may contain random !
(exclamation point) characters.
Printer is out of paper.
The printed output may contain a random ?
(question mark) characters.
Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.
1
Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.
1
Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to Send.
Set printer serial interface parameters to match those of the host.
Clear jam and reload paper. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Close the platen lever.
Make a configuration printout.
Set printer serial interface parameters to match host configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to Send.
Load paper and press CLEAR.
Check your printer serial interface parameter settings; if necessary, adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host.
317
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
414:RIBBON STALL
415:SHUTTLE JAM
416:STACKER FULL
417:STACKER JAM
418:RBN INK LOW
Change RBN Soon
419:RBN INK OUT*
Install New RBN
420:EXC RBN WEAR
Install New RBN
423:OLD RIBBON
Install New RBN
425:UNKNOWN RBN2
Install New RBN
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
The controller board does not detect ribbon movement.
No shuttle movement or shuttle moving at the wrong speed.
Status message: the power paper stacker is full of paper.
This message is triggered if there is paper inside the throat of the stacker elevator, but the elevator is not moving.
Check the ribbon path for jams.
Turn the Ribbon Tension Knob clockwise a few rotations. If necessary, install a new ribbon.
Check for obstruction to shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or platen lever closed too tightly. If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Unload the stacker. If fault persists, contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Open the cabinet rear door and check for obstructions preventing elevator movement. Remove any obstructions.
2.
Run the print job again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Status message indicating the Integrated Print
Management System is enabled and ribbon ink level is 2%.
Integrated Print
Management System software has determined that the ribbon is out of ink.
Status message that displays when ribbon reaches end of life, whether the Integrated Print
Management System is enabled or not.
The sensor detects a ribbon that was previously declared to be at the end of its service life.
The sensor detects a bar code, but the region code does not match the printer.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
318
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
427:CRTG MISSING
Install new cart
Press ONLINE
428:CRTG COMM ER
See User Manual
432:CRT NOT SET
435:NO WELD
See User Manual
437:REG MISSING
Use Correct RBN
438:TIP MISMATCH
Use Correct RBN
439:SHTL MISMATCH
Use Correct RBN
445:SD INSERTED
Reboot Printer
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Explanation Solution
The ribbon cartridge is missing or installed improperly.
The hardware cannot communicate properly with the cartridge.
The ribbon cartridge is not correctly positioned.
The cartridge weld was not detected.
The incorrect cartridge type is being used for the printer.
The incorrect cartridge type is being used for the printer.
This message displays when an Extended Life Ribbon is mounted on a 500 lpm printer.
The SD card has been inserted after the printer was already powered up.
1.
Make sure a ribbon cartridge is installed in the printer.
2.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
3.
Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary.
4.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
1.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
2.
Remove and replace the ribbon cartridge if necessary.
3.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Make sure a ribbon cartridge is installed in the printer.
2.
Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly.
3.
Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary.
4.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Install region X ribbon cartridge in the printer.
NOTE: Specify the region of the printer when ordering ribbons.
Install the correct ribbon cartridge type in the printer.
Install Standard Life Ribbon.
Turn off the printer and insert the
SD card only when the printer is not powered on.
319
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
446:SD REMOVED
Reboot Printer
447:SD FL EXIST
Enable Overwrite
448:SD WRT. FAIL
WRITE PROTECTED
Check SD Card
449:SD FILE WRITE
Check SD
450:SD FILE FULL
File Too Big
451:SD NOT FOUND
Insert SD Card
Pwr Off Printer
452:SD FILE FULL
Delete Files
453:SD READING
Do not Remove
454:SD WRITING
Do not Remove
607:CTL VOLT FAIL*
608:DRIVER CIRCUIT
BAD
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Explanation Solution
The SD card has been removed after the printer was already powered up.
A write operation to the SD has failed because the file already exists on the SD card and the overwriting of existing files is disabled.
A write operation to the SD has failed because the SD card is write protected.
Turn off the printer and remove the SD card only when the printer is off.
Enable overwriting of files on the
SD using the overwrite files menu.
A write operation to the SD has failed for an unknown reason.
A write operation to the SD has failed because the file is too big to fit in the remaining space on the SD card.
A write operation to the SD could not be performed because the SD card was not detected.
The SD file system is completely full.
The SD card is currently reading files.
The SD card is currently writing or erasing files.
Controller Voltage Failure.
15 V failure on the controller board.
Driver Circuit Bad. The hammer coil count test failed.
Ensure that the write protect tab on the SD card is not active. If the write protect tab is not active, use another SD card.
Ensure that the SD card is inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC card.
Delete files on the SD card to make space.
Ensure that an SD card is inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC card.
Delete files on the SD card to make space.
Wait until reading completes.
Wait until the write or erase operation completes.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
320
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
609:EXHAUST FAN
CHECK
(Cabinet model only)
613: HAM. COIL BAD
#, #, #, ...etc
614:HAMMER BANK*
NOT INSTALLED
615:HAMMER FAN
CHECK
617:LOWER DRIVER
SHORT*
619:PAPER FEED
DRIVER CIRCUIT*
See Manual
620:POWER VOLT
CHECK*
622:SHUTTLE
DRIVER CRCUIT*
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
Sensor cannot detect current in fan circuit.
Hammer coil # failed current test at power up.
Power off the printer and remove the paper path (see
Maintenance Manual). Check that the fan cable connector is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway, and remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Hammer Bank Not Installed.
Self-test routines do not detect hammer coils at printer start-up.
Sensor cannot detect current in fan circuit.
Check that fan cable is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway; remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Lower Driver Short.
Circuit(s) on the hammer bank or in the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground.
Paper Feed Driver Circuit.
The paper feed driver circuit on the controller board is drawing too much current.
Power Supply Voltage. The power supply has failed.
The shuttle driver circuit on the controller board is drawing too much current.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Replace power supply board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
321
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
623:STACKER FAULT
624:UPPER DRIVER
SHORT*
702:FIRMWARE
ERROR*
703:ILLEGAL
EXTERNAL BUS ACC*
No
704:ILLEGAL
INSTRUCTION ACC*
705:ILLEGAL
OPERAND ACCESS*
706:PAP BAD TABLE*
708:PAPER FIFO
OVERFLOW*
709:PAPER FIFO
UNDERFLOW*
710:PAP ILLGL ST*
713:PAP INVLD
PARM*
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
712:PAP INVLD CMD* No
No
Explanation Solution
Stacker is not functioning correctly.
Upper Driver Short. Hammer driver circuits on the boards shorted to ground.
Check for obstructions in the stacker area. If fault persists, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Application software tried to perform an illegal printer function or damaged memory detected on the controller board.
Illegal External Bus Access.
Firmware error on the controller board.
Illegal Instruction Accessed.
Firmware error on the controller board.
Illegal Operand Accessed.
Firmware error on controller board.
Paper Bad Table. The paper feed process on the controller board has a corrupted table.
Paper First In First Out
Overflow. Firmware error on controller board.
Paper First In First Out
Underflow. Firmware error on controller board.
Paper Illegal State. Firmware error on controller board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
Contact your authorized service representative.
Contact your authorized service representative.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
1
1
1
Contact your authorized service
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Paper Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller board.
Paper Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
322
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
717:PLAT INV CMD*
718:PLAT INV PARM*
720:PROTECTED
INSTRUCTION*
721:RIB INVLD CMD*
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
No
No
719:PLAT INV STATE* No
No
Yes
Explanation
Platen Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller board.
Platen Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller board.
Platen Invalid State.
Firmware error on controller board.
Protected Instruction.
Firmware error on controller board.
Ribbon Invalid Command.
Firmware error on the controller board.
723:SHUTL INV CMD* No
724 SHUTL INV
PARM*
725:SHUTL OVER
SPEED*
727:SOFTWARE
ERROR*
730:TCB
CORRUPTED*
733 DP FIFO Busy*
No
No
No
No
Yes
Solution
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Shuttle Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller board.
Shuttle Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller board.
The shuttle is oscillating too rapidly.
Application software tried to perform illegal printer function, or damaged logic circuits found on controller board.
Task Control Block
Corrupted. Firmware error on controller board.
There is a timing problem in the Engine Controller firmware.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, download the emulation software again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message reappears, download the emulation software again.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
1
323
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
B12 ERROR:
PROGRAM MISSING*
B13 ERROR: NOT
COMPATIBLE*
B20 STATUS :00%
DOWNLOAD MODE
B21 STATUS:
PRINTER RESET
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE*
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS
CKSUM*
B30 STATUS:
INITIALIZING...
B50 STATUS:
PANEL CODE BAD
B51 STATUS: XX%
LOADING...
Can User
Correct?
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
N/A
No
No
Explanation Solution
The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
Attempting to download a program that is not compatible with the printer.
There is no program in printer memory. Download printer firmware again.
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
Status message informing the operator that software is being downloaded.
Percentage figure indicates approximate amount loaded into the printer.
Status message informing the operator that the printer is undergoing a system reset.
FLASH memory has not passed boot initialization tests.
No action is required.
FLASH memory has not passed boot initialization tests.
Status message: the printer is running its initialization routines after startup and successful memory tests.
Saved version of Panel
Code is corrupt.
Status message: printer boot-up routines are loading printer system software into flash memory and SDRAM.
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
Reload released Firmware.
No action required.
324
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
BAD NVM CALL 1
BAD NVM CALL 2
BAD NVM CALL 3
BAD NVM CALL 4
BAD NVM CALL A
Bxx ERROR: NO
DOWNLOADER
FOUND
CATASTROPHIC
ERROR
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Printer firmware code error with the Novram module that stores configurations and statistics.
No No Downloader was found while downloading a file.
Solution
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message and follow the instructions on
your authorized service representative.
1
Reload released Firmware.
No
CLEARING
PROGRAM FROM
FLASH
D50 Status
UPGRADING PANEL
D51 Status %XX
Programming...
DIAGNOSTIC
PASSED
No
No
No
No
DO NOT POWER OFF No
Fatal error in printer.
Status message: emulation software successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched. The old program is now being deleted from flash memory.
Status message: The printer is upgrading the panel, where %XX represents the percentage completed.
Status message: The printer is loading firmware, where
%XX represents the percentage completed.
Status message: the printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests.
Status message: The printer is performing an operation that must be completed before you can cycle power.
Contact your authorized customer service representative.
1
No action is required.
No action is required.
No action is required.
No action is required.
No action is required, but do not power off the printer until the operation is complete.
325
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
E01A TYPE 0x40
E01B TYPE 0x60
E02 MACHINE CHK
E03A DSI HASH L
E03B DSI HASH S
E03C DSI BAT PL
E03D DSI BAT PS
E03E DSI CXIWX
E03F DSI CXOWX
E03G DSI ECXIWX
E03H DSI ECXOWX
E04A ISI NO TRA
E04B ISI DIRECT
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
E12 SYSTEM CALL
E13 TRACE INT
E16 ITRANS MISS
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT 0 BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or unsupported instruction was attempted in the application program.
Solution
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message, follow the instructions on
your authorized service representative.
1
3.
Power off the printer.
Provide this fault message and the messages you recorded from the exception menu to your next higher support facility.
See User Manual
326
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
E-Net Test Unavailable Yes
ERROR NOR
FLASHED WAS
NOT CLEARED
ERROR: DC
PROGRAM NOT
VALID
No
Yes
Explanation
The ethernet PCBA did not initialize correctly.
Problem programming Boot
Code.
Solution
Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
Ready” to display, then retry operation. If it still fails, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
ERROR: LOCKED
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnn
No
ERROR: NVRAM
FAILURE
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
ERROR: SECURITY
KEY NOT DETECTED
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
ERROR: WRONG
OEM
ERROR: WRONG
PRINTER TYPE
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
The printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn is the serial number of the printer’s security key. The
SPX serial number does not match the printer’s serial number and cannot be used with the printer.
The non-volatile SRAM on the controller board has failed.
The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program.
The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
The security key is not present or failed.
Download the program again. If the message appears, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Use the correct emulation software options(s) for this printer model.
There is no program in printer memory. Download the emulation.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
The printer received the complete program but the checksum did not match.
The data may have been corrupted during downloading.
The SPX inserted in the debug port is not intended for this model printer or this
OEM.
The SPX inserted in the debug port is not intended for this model printer or this
OEM.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
327
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
ETHERNET
DETECTED
ETHERNET
INITIALIZING
EXCEPTION ERROR
FLASH: CHECK
RETURN
FLASH: WAS NOT
CLEARED
FLASH: WRITE
ERROR # 2
GENERATING XX%
NAND FLASH TABLE
H00: PCI SLOT ?
See User Manual
H01: PCI J12
See User Manual
Can User
Correct?
N/A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
Status message indicating that the Network Interface
Card has established connection.
Status message: the internal
Network Interface Card is processing the boot procedure. (May occur with older versions of microcode.)
An EXCEPTION
INTERRUPT has occurred.
No action is required.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
Printer encountered an error while trying to program Flash memory.
NAND FLASH is being read and system tables are being initialized.
The controller board is not communicating with a PCI card. This could indicate a bad PCI card, poor connection, or problem in the PCI bus.
The controller board is not communicating with the PCI card in PCI slot J12. This could indicate a bad PCI card, poor connection, or problem in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized service representative.
Contact your authorized service representative.
representative.
1
1
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
328
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
<Online, etc...>
Half Speed Mode
ILL NVM VALUE 5
ILL NVM VALUE 6
ILL NVM VALUE 7
INITIALIZING...
INTAKE FAN CHECK
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
Can User
Correct?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
INTERRUPT UNUSED
VECTOR 00
No
No
Explanation Solution
Status message: The controller samples the operating temperature of key components of the print mechanism. When higher than normal temperatures are sensed, the print speed is automatically reduced by
50% and the message sent the LCD. When the components cool down, the print speed returns to 100% and the message clears.
Illegal value was stored into the Novram module.
No action is required. If the message appears often, contact your authorized service representative.
1
1.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, load the latest emulation software.
2.
Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, record the exact display message, follow the instructions on
your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
This message indicates the printer is beginning its initialization process.
Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit.
The controller board receives an interrupt it does not understand. The problem can be created by electrical noise, by a software problem, or by a hardware problem.
Status message: the new emulation program is loading into printer RAM. XX% indicates how much of the program has loaded.
Cycle power. If the message appears, press CLEAR. If the message does not clear, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Cycle power. If this message occurred once and never again, you can ignore it. If the message reappears or appears consistently, contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
329
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
NON VOLATILE
MEMORY FAILED
ONLINE
PANEL
BAD CHECKSUM
No
PARAMETER ERROR* No
PLAT DRVR CIR
PLEASE WAIT...
RESET IN
PROGRESS
PRINTER UNDER
REMOTE CONTROL
PROCESSOR
HALTED
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
REMOVE USED SPX
THEN PRESS ENTER
Can User
Correct?
No
NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER
No
No
N/A
No
N/A
No
No
No
Explanation Solution
The printer has deleted the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory.
The printer detects an SPX installed at the debug port and the SPX is valid for the printer.
Large emulations reduce the amount of space available for saving configurations, which means that sometimes fewer than eight configurations can be saved.
Printer state message: printer is online and in communication with host.
Panel Code has a bad
Checksum.
Illegal parameter value received in command code over a TN emulation.
Platen driver circuit malfunction.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
representative.
1
Contact your authorized service
1
No action is required.
Reload released firmware.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Status message: the printer finished loading the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself.
Status message: The printer is under the control of
PrintNet Enterprise (PNE) remote management software.
Real-time System Firmware error on controller board.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
No action is required.
No action is required.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
RESTORING BOOT
CODE
No
Status message: An SPX is depleted because it has successfully reprogrammed the security key on the controller board.
Normal download initialization message.
No action is required.
330
Printing a Hex Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
SCS COMMAND
ERROR*
SD CARD ERROR
Remove SD Card
SDSC CARD
NOT SUPPORTED
Remove SD Card
SECURITY
VIOLATION*
SECURITY KEY NOT
DETECTED
SF ERROR
SHUTTLE STALL
SPX FOUND, ERROR:
KEY NOT DETECTED
SPX NOT NEEDED
OPTIONS ENABLED
No
No
SYS R/T ERROR
Can User
Correct?
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Explanation Solution
In the TN emulation, the printer received undefined control character (hex 40).
The printer has been powered up with a card in the SD slot, but the card is not functioning properly. The card could be a compact flash card or a nonsupported card.
The printer has been powered up with an SDSC card, and SDSC cards (< 4
GB) are not supported.
Security code of PAL on controller board does not match code of firmware on the controller board.
The security key is not present or has failed.
Contact your system administrator.
Power down, reseat card, and power up again. If error persists, power down, remove card, and try another card.
Power down, remove SD card, and insert an SDHC card in the printer.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Structured Field Error.
Application software has violated structured data field parameters.
The shuttle is not moving.
The controller board does not have a security key.
The user has attempted to use the SPX to turn on printer options that are already enabled.
Software issue.
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Not a printer problem. Have the system administrator correct applications data or configuration.
Set the platen lever to match the thickness of paper, but not too tightly. Check and adjust the platen gap. Inspect the ribbon mask for deformation that snags and interferes with shuttle movement. If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
Contact your authorized service representative.
1
331
Chapter 8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation Solution
TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message reported by the Printer Manager when ethernet interface option is installed. The network address given in the printer properties was reached, but the printer port is busy.
Refer to the Printronix P8000
Maintenance Manual.
1
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message still displays, then contact your authorized service representative.
332
A
Printer Specifications
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications
ASCII
P/N
Extended Life, 1 Pack
Extended Life, 4 Pack
Standard Life, 1 Pack
Europe,
Middle East,
& Africa
-101
-401
-101
North America,
Latin America
(excludes
Brazil), Canada
-102
-402
-102
Asia Pacific
(excludes
China and
India)
-103
-403
-103
HD and H-Series
India and
Brazil
-104
-104
-104
P/N
Extended Life, 1 Pack
Extended Life, 4 Pack
Standard Life, 1 Pack
Standard Life, 4 Pack
Europe,
Middle East,
& Africa
-101
-401
N/A
North America,
Latin America
(excludes
Brazil), Canada
-102
-402
N/A
Asia Pacific
(excludes
China and
India)
-103
-403
-103
-403
India and
Brazil
-104
-404
-104
-404
333
Appendix A
Paper Specifications
Paper Specifications
Labels
Type:
Thickness:
Sheet Thickness:
Drive:
Edge-perforated, fan-fold, 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, 2 to 12 inches (5.08 to 30.48 cm) long.
SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches
(12.7 to 30.48 cm) long and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without the paper tent or 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper tent installed.
Single-part: 15 to 100 pound (56 to 163 g/m
2
) stock;
Multi-part: 1- to 6-part forms
0.025 inch (0.064 cm) maximum
Adjustable tractors (6-pin engagement)
On Backing: One-part continuous perforated fanfold back form. Labels must be placed at least 1/6 inch (0.42 cm) from the fan-fold perforation. Backing adhesive must not be squeezed out during printing.
Sheet Size: 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, including the two standard perforated tractor feed strips. A maximum sheet length of 16 inches (40.64 cm) between top and bottom perforations.
NOTE: A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model. Power Paper
Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.48 cm) long.
Thickness: Not to exceed 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) (including backing sheet)
334
Printer Weight and Dimensions
Cabinet Type
Tabletop (with riser)
Cabinet
NOTE: For cabinet models with a power stacker, the weight increases by 21 lbs. and the depth increases by
4.75 inches for a deeper rear door.
Open Pedestal
Enclosed Pedestal
Height
(inches)
18.25
42.5
Dimensions
Width
(inches)
25.75
27
Depth
(inches)
19.48
29
Weight
Unpacked
(pounds)
100
200
Packaged
(pounds)
124
260
35
36
24.5
25.75
27
19.5
115
140
153
185
Environmental Characteristics
Temperature:
Operating:
Storage:
Relative Humidity
Operating:
Storage:
50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters)
50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C) up to 6560 feet (2000 meters)
-40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C)
15% to 80% (noncondensing)
15% to 90% (noncondensing)
335
Appendix A
Acoustic Noise Level
Acoustic Noise Level
Printer Models
Tabletop
Cabinet
Pedestal
Enclosed Pedestal
Zero Tear
Table 1. Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296
Printing
65 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm))
50 dB (ASCII 500 lpm/1000 lpm)
52 dB (300 lpm, 1500 lpm)
55 dB (600 lpm, 800 lpm, 2000 lpm)
62 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
65 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
58 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
60 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
66 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
50 dB
Standby
48 dB
50 dB
48 dB
50 dB
336
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)
Electrical Characteristics
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)
Printer
Type
Tabletop
Tabletop
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Pedestal
Pedestal
Enclosed
Pedestal
Enclosed
Pedestal
Zero Tear
Pedestal
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8010
P8005ZT
P8010ZT
P8005
P8010
P8205
P8210
P8215
P8220
P8005
P8010
P8005
Configuration
Voltage
(+/-10%)
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
Freq
(+/-10%)
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Amps
(Max)
5A
5A
5A
5A
9A
9A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
Watts
(Typical)
320W
320W
320W
320W
475W
475W
320W
320W
320W
320W
320W
320W
BTU/Hr
(Typical)
1093
1093
1093
1093
1622
1622
1093
1093
1093
1093
1093
1093
The above values are calculated while printing 136 column, all upper case high speed “E’s”. The stand-by (Energy Saver mode) wattage is 5W
(17 BTU/Hr) for all models.
337
Appendix A
Interfaces
Input Voltage (H-Series Models)
Printer
Type
Tabletop
Tabletop
Tabletop
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Pedestal
Pedestal
Enclosed
Pedestal
Enclosed
Pedestal
Zero Tear
Pedestal
Zero Tear
Pedestal
Zero Tear
Pedestal
Model
P8003H
P8006H
P8000HD
P8203H
P8206H
P8208H
P8200HD
P8003H
P8006H
P8003H
P8006H
P8003HZT
P8006HZT
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
P8000HDZT AC 100-240V
Voltage
(+/-10%)
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
AC 100-240V
Interfaces
Freq
(+/-10%)
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Amps
(Max)
9A
9A
9A
5A
5A
9A
9A
5A
9A
5A
Watts
(Typical)
320W
475W
475W
320W
475W
475W
475W
320W
475W
320W
BTU/Hr
(Typical)
1093
1622
1622
1622
1622
1622
1622
2053
2053
1093
9A
5A
475W
320W
1622
1622
9A
9A
475W
475W
1622
1622
Type:
Logic Levels:
Transfer Rates:
Standard:
Optional:
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
RS-232 serial
IEEE 1284 Parallel
Centronics Parallel
Ethernet 10/100Base-T
TTL/EIA
®
-232E/EIA-422B
Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface.
Up to 115.2K baud on RS-232 serial interface.
338
Printing Speed
The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute (lpm) and is a function of the selected font and the vertical dot density. Printing speed is independent of the number of characters configured in the character set repertoire. Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or emphasized printing, superscripts, subscripts, or elongated attributes will decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes. The exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific print job, but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes.
The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a single line. This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing different fonts on a print line. Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed also affects throughput.
339
Appendix A
Printing Speed
340
B
ASCII Character Set
KEY
B7
0
BITS
B4 B3 B2 B1
ROW
COLUMN
0
0
0 0
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0
0
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
DLE
DC1
(XON)
DC2
10
8
8
11
9
9
6
6
6
5
5
5
7
7
7
12
10
0 A
4
4
4
3
3
3
15
13
0 D
16
14
0 E
13
11
0 B
14
12
0 C
17
15
0 F
DC3
(XOFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
23
19
13
24
20
14
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
25
21
15
26
22
16
32
26
1A
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
37
31
1F
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
B7
BITS
B6
B5
B4 B3 B2 B1
1 0 1 1
0
1
0
0
1
0
ESC
0
1
33
27
1B
OCTAL equivalent
DECIMAL equivalent
HEX equivalent
ASCII Character Name
1 1
0 0
1 0 1
1
1
SP
(
)
-
'
!
"
#
$
%
&
*
+
,
.
/
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
3
70
56
38
71
57
39
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
72
58
3A
63
51
33
64
52
34
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
77
63
3F
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
4
110
72
48
111
73
49
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
112
74
4A
103
67
43
104
68
44
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
117
79
4F
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
50
40
28
51
41
29
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
52
42
2A
43
35
23
44
36
24
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
57
47
2F
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
5
130
88
58
131
89
59
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
132
90
5A
123
83
53
124
84
54
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
137
95
5F
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52 a b c d e g h k l j i f m n o
6
0
150
104
68
151
105
69
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
152
106
6A
143
99
63
144
100
64
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
157
111
6F
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
1
1
1
7 p q r s t u v w x y z
{
|
}
~
DEL
170
120
78
171
121
79
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
172
122
7A
163
115
73
164
116
74
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
177
127
7F
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
341
Appendix B
ASCII Character Set
342
C
SureStak
™
Power Stacker
Introduction
The SureStak Power Stacker is a factory-installed option that augments the paper feed system of cabinet model printers. It is designed to work with forms
5 to 12 inches long (12.7 to 30.5 cm) and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without the paper tent installed or up to 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper tent
installed. (See Figure 1.) Using longer or shorter paper can cause error
messages and unpredictable operation of the stacker.
Because most of the stacker assembly is inside the cabinet, you must remove the stacker from the printer to service it or replace most of its components.
Stacker Operation
The power stacker mechanically directs the paper from the printer to the paper stack. It is mounted in the rear of the cabinet and has its own control
panel. Its main components are shown in Figure 1.
Paper Throat
Elevator
Disable Switch
Elevator Lift
Handle
Paper Length
Indicator
Bearing Bracket
Rear Control
Panel
Pinch Rollers
Paper Tent
Figure 1. Power Stacker Component Locations
343
Appendix C
Stacker Operation
Setting Up the Power Stacker
1.
Set the printer power switch to | (On).
2.
If necessary, press the ONLINE key on the front panel or rear control
panel to take the printer offline. (Figure 2.)
3.
Press the ELEVATOR UP key and wait for the elevator assembly to
reach the top of its travel. (Figure 2.)
A
ON/O
FF
ON LIN
E
A
ON LINE
PAPER ADVANCE
ELEVATOR UP
ELEVATOR DOWN
Figure 2. The Rear Control Panel
344
Paper Tray
Stacker Operation
4.
If the paper you will use is not wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) pull out
the paper tray and install the wireform paper tent. (Figure 3.) If the paper
is wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) leave the paper tent out of the printer.
A
Paper Tent
A
Note the positions of alignment tab and the paper fence.
Figure 3. The Paper Tent
345
Appendix C
Stacker Operation
5.
Push or pull the paddle shaft toward the front or the rear of the printer to set the desired paper length. Align the indicator notch on the bearing bracket with the paper length indicator. The power stacker can handle
paper or forms from 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.5 cm) long. (Figure 4.)
A
Paddle Shaft
Paper Length Indicator
Bearing Bracket
Figure 4. The Paper Length Indicator
A
346
Stacker Operation
Loading and Starting the Power Stacker
1.
Press the PAPER ADVANCE key and hand feed the paper down into the paper throat of the stacker. Continue to advance the paper until it reaches the paper tent (if installed) and feed three to five extra sheets into the stacker. Make sure the paper passes through the paper throat of the
2.
Stack the extra pages on top of the wire paper tent (if installed), making
sure the paper bends with the natural fold. (Figure 5.)
3.
Press the ONLINE key to put the printer in the online state. The stacker elevator will return to the correct position for printing.
4.
Check that the paper is still centered between the sides of the paper tent
(if installed).
5.
Close the cabinet rear door.
6.
If necessary, set Top Of Form.
A
ON LINE
PAPER
ADVANCE
A
Figure 5. Stacking Paper on the Wire Paper Tent
347
Appendix C
Stacker Operation
348
D
Zero Tear Pedestal Printer
Overview
The P8000 Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP) printer can print a form and present it for tear off without losing a form between print jobs. The printer automatically presents the current print line to the tear bar when it finishes printing and no data are being sent to the printer. When it receives more data from the host computer, the printer pulls the form down to the print station and resumes printing.
The ZTP printer is available as follows:
•
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
•
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
•
OpenPrint HD models.
349
Appendix D
Operation
Operation
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
A
A
Note: Paper guides located underneath.
Front Paper
Guide Leaf (3)
Paper Guide
Knob (3)
Figure 1. Adjusting the Paper Guides
NOTE: This operation is typically done during initial setup. Before beginning the procedure, ensure that the paper guides are not damaged.
1.
Remove the left paper guide knob and the left, front paper guide leaf.
2.
Remove the right paper guide knob and the right, front paper guide leaf.
3.
Remove the center paper guide knob and the center, front paper guide leaf.
350
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides
Tractor (2)
.5
''
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
Paper
.5
''
Outboard Mount
Block (2)
Center Mount
Block
Figure 2. Adjusting Paper Guide Leaves
4.
Slide the left outboard mount block so that the left outer paper guide leaf
is .5 inches from the left tractor. (See Figure 2).
5.
Slide the right outboard mount block so that the right outer paper guide leaf is .5 inches from the right tractor.
6.
Slide the center mount block so that the center paper guide leaf is centered between the left and right outer paper guide leaves.
7.
Install the paper guide knobs and front paper guide leaves.
351
Appendix D
Operation
Load Paper
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Tractor Door
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
Front Paper
Guide Leaf (3)
Paper
A
Paper Out
Sensor
Label
Paper
Edge of
Paper
Box
Paper Supply
Box
A
352
Figure 3. Loading Paper onto the Printer
1.
Align the paper supply box with the label on the left side of the floor.
2.
Unlock and open the tractor doors and slide the paper from below, through the black paper out sensor slot on the left side, and up between all front and rear paper guides.
3.
Load the paper on the left tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.
4.
Load the paper onto the right tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.
Paper
Tractor (2)
Tractor
Lock (2)
Load Paper
Figure 4. Adjusting the Horizontal Paper Tension
5.
Adjust the paper web tightness by sliding the right tractor to remove slack
or to adjust for various paper widths. (See Figure 4.)
6.
Lock the tractors in position by pressing down on the tractor locks.
Paper
Tear Bar
Figure 5. Paper Exiting the Top of the Printer
353
Appendix D
Operation
Position the Paper Out Sensor
Sensor Knob
At least 2 inches
Paper Out Sensor
Paper
Figure 6. The Paper Out Sensor
The paper out sensor indicates when the printer runs out of paper. (The sensor does not work with black backed forms.) Unlike the standard pedestal printer, the ZT printer requires you to load the paper through the paper out
sensor slot (Figure 3 and Figure 6). Correct positioning of the paper out
sensor ensures that the last form the printer prints will be properly presented to the tear bar. To position the paper out sensor, do the following:
1.
Position the paper properly at the tear bar (page 356).
2.
Loosen the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knob counterclockwise.
3.
Position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between the bottom of the aluminum extrusion bar and the top of the paper out sensor.
IMPORTANT
For optimal performance, 2 inches is recommended for 11 inch forms.
For shorter forms, position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between a perforation and the top of the paper out sensor.
4.
Tighten the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knobs clockwise.
5.
Press ONLINE. When the first print job is sent to the printer, the paper is drawn into the printer, the top of form aligns with the print station, and the print job begins.
354
Set the Tear Bar Distance
Set the Tear Bar Distance
To set the tear bar distance, do the following steps:
1.
Make sure the printer is offline.
2.
Press ENTER key to enter Menu mode.
3.
Press the right arrow
Z until the PRINTER CONTROL icon is highlighted.
4.
Press ENTER to go into PRINTER CONTROL.
5.
Press the down arrow
V until “ZTP SETTINGS” is highlighted.
6.
Press ENTER to go into the “ZTP SETTINGS” submenu.
7.
Press the down arrow
V until “ZTP TearDistance” is highlighted.
8.
Press the left arrow
Y or right arrow Z to decrease or increase the tear bar distance in increments of 1/144th of an inch.
9.
Press ENTER to select the desired value. An asterisk appears next the selected value and a scale prints to indicate the tear bar distance in relation to the tear bar. For correct tear bar distance, the zero should align
with the tear bar. See Figure 7.
NOTE: The Tear Distance value must be changed to print the scale.
+50
0
Physical TearBar
Position
-50
Correct
TearBar
Distance
Print Station
Figure 7. Correct Tear Bar Distance
NOTE: When a new ZTP Tear Bar Dist value is selected, the printer will lose the current print position until you reset the top of form to automatically save the new value.
10. Reset the top of form using the procedure on page 356.
355
Appendix D
Operation
Set the Top of Form
Tear Bar
Paper
Form Advance
Knob
356
Figure 8. Setting The Tear Off Position
The ZT printer uses the tear bar as the reference point for setting the tear off position. To set the position of the forms perforation to the tear bar, use the
SET TOF button as follows:
1.
Make sure the paper guides are adjusted correctly and the paper is properly loaded.
2.
Press the TOF button on the control panel. The printer LCD will display
“Align at TearBar/Then Press TOF”.
3.
Use the form advance knob to move the top of the form to the tear off bar.
4.
Position the perforation so it aligns with the tear off bar.
NOTE: This is easily done by advancing one complete sheet above the tear off bar and folding it over at the perforation.
5.
Position the fold exactly at the tear bar.
6.
Tear the sheet off to ensure proper positioning.
NOTE: If you do not want to lose a form, position the top of the form at the tear bar. Run a finger along the back of the form along the tear bar to ensure the perforation is presented at the tear off point.
7.
Press the TOF button again. The printer LCD will display “Top Of Form
Set/Press ONLINE”. The printer will then be brought OFFLINE and the top of form will be set.
NOTE: Unlike the non-ZTP models, the paper will not move.
8.
Press the ONLINE key to bring the printer online.
Set the Top of Form
ZTP SETTINGS Menu
The ZTP SETTINGS menu includes the ability to enable and disable features unique to the Zero Tear printer (ZTP), set the tear bar distance, set the auto present data time, and set the auto present wait time. This section defines these options.
ZTP
SETTINGS
1
* = Factory Default
1
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
ZTP
Data Time
.5 Sec*
1.0 - 15.0 Sec
ZTP
Wait Time
2 Sec*
3 - 10 Sec
1 Sec
ZTP
TearDistance
1060/144 Inch*
ZTP
Platen Open
Enable*
Disable
ZTP
Function
Enable*
Disable
ZTP Data Time
This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The values range from .5 to 15 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.
ZTP Wait Time
This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to print the next form. The adjustable values range from 1 to 10 seconds in increments of 1 second. The default value is 2 seconds.
ZTP TearDistance
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The left and right arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new value.
ZTP Platen Open
This option allows the user to have the platen open whenever forms are reversed. Enabled is the default, used for most papers and labels. The feature can be disabled as required by some multi-part forms.
357
Appendix D
Performance Limitations
ZTP Function
This option enables or disables all unique ZTP functions. The default is
Enable.
NOTE: When the ZTP Function is enabled, the VIEW key is disabled and
Slow Paper Slew is enabled.
Performance Limitations
Forms Type
The paper feed tractors on the ZT printer push the paper up through the print station instead of pulling it through, as in the standard pedestal printer. This limits the variety of forms the ZT printer can use. If the forms do not fall within
the range specified in Table 1, dot compression and line separation may
occur. The user should match the media to the application to ensure acceptable print quality. Also, because paper is pushed from below the print station, the last form in the tractors may not print fully or may not be presented to the printer exit for retrieval.
All paper used in the ZT printer requires standard half inch spaced tractor feed holes. Cut sheet and continuous friction fed paper is not supported. The
forms specified in Table 1 can have no more than one form per page
horizontally.
Table 1. Forms Type
Description Length
Width
(edge to edge)
One to three part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded, edge-perforated paper forms
One to four part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded, edge-perforated paper forms
One to four part, continuous, carbonless, fan-folded, edge-perforated paper forms
One to six part, continuous, carbonless, fan-folded, edgeperforated paper forms
Forms with a paper weight of 20 to 100 pounds and a maximum thickness of 0.025 inches
Forms with a paper weight of 18 to 100 pounds and a maximum thickness of 0.025 inches
Forms with all approved types of interleaf edge attachment except those using metallic or other hard devices
3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 16.5 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
3 to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches
NOTE: If you use forms outside these limits, the print quality may not be optimum, the printer may lose top-of-form, or the frequency of paper jams will increase.
358
Set the Top of Form
Paper Jams
Printer jams can occur if you tear off the form incorrectly. If you experience two or more paper jams per box of forms, follow these guidelines to help reduce jams:
•
Position the lower paper guides properly
•
Align the paper web tightness properly
•
Position the form perforation against the tear bar
•
Time the tear, while the paper is not moving
•
Direct the tear force toward the user and across the tear bar, not upward.
To Clear Paper Jams
1.
Raise the platen lever to open the platen.
2.
Open the left and right tractor doors.
3.
Pull the paper upward through the top of the printer.
NOTE: DO NOT pull the paper downwards from the bottom. This could cause the paper guides to bend.
4.
Reload the paper (see page 352).
359
Appendix D
Performance Limitations
360
E
Quick Change Memory
Cartridge (QCMC)
Overview
The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved configurations, and custom files quickly through the printer’s control panel with a user friendly interface. No external host or files are needed to transfer this information to the QCMC. A “snapshot image” is saved of the printer’s firmware, configuration settings, and custom files. The saved image can be copied to any number of printers using the same QCMC so that the printers will be identically configured (assumes same printer hardware and options are present).
The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address when the cartridge is left installed in a printer. This allows a mission critical printer to be exchanged quickly with a spare printer that will be identically configured, including the network MAC address.
The following are examples of how the QCMC may make printer management more convenient:
•
A site has 10 printers to install that should all be configured identically.
Rather than inputting the information through the control panel individually to each printer, insert the QCMC into the first printer, capture the changes, then easily share the image with the other nine printers.
•
A site is adding additional printers and wants them configured the same as the printers already installed, but is unsure what changes were originally made. By using the QCMC to capture the exact image of the older printers, no custom settings will be missed.
•
A printer is set up on a network that is configured to only allow recognized
MAC addresses to access the network. If the printer with the QCMC installed needs repair and must be removed from the network, the MAC that resides on the QCMC can be easily transferred to the replacement printer, along with all the configuration information and any other files stored as the “snapshot image” on the QCMC, making the replacement printer an exact duplicate for the downed printer. By using the MAC address that resides on the QCMC, the replacement printer can be installed without notifying the network administrator, thereby simplifying the exchange.
361
Appendix E
Installing the QCMC
Installing the QCMC
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the QCMC, or you may damage the QCMC and the printer. If you remove the QCMC after powering on the printer with the QCMC installed, the fault message
“SD REMOVED Reboot Printer” will display. You cannot clear this message by reinserting the QCMC. You must cycle power.
1.
Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2.
Insert the SD card into the QCMC slot on the back of the printer.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
QCMC Slot
Figure 1. QCMC Slot on Back of Cabinet Model
362
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
QCMC Slot
Figure 2. QCMC Slot on Back of Pedestal
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
NOTE: The MAC address residing on the QCMC will be used in place of the
MAC assigned to the printer’s own network card whenever the QCMC is installed. If you do not want to identify the printer with this MAC address, make sure the QCMC is removed from the printer before attaching the printer to the network.
When the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC at power-up, a check of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image available. If no printer flash image exists on the QCMC, the software will then check to see if there are any saved configurations in the printer’s NVRAM memory. If the QCMC is blank (no flash image) and saved configurations are detected in the printer’s NVRAM then you will be prompted with a message on the front panel to save the printer’s configuration to the
QCMC.
QMC DETECTED
Save to QCMC?
Continue Press <ENTER>
Skip Press <CANCEL>
NOTE: This screen will appear every time at power-up until the printer’s flash is saved to the QCMC.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation and not save any information to the QCMC. On subsequent power-ups the
Save message on page 363 will display again.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online, but instead will copy the printer’s entire flash image to the QCMC, creating a snapshot of the printer’s memory.
Below is a list of items that will be saved to the QCMC:
•
Printer Program File (software)
•
Custom configurations (1–8)
•
Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
•
All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
•
Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
•
Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to the printer.
While the printer is saving its QCMC settings to the EMC, the following message will display. Do not interrupt the process.
363
Appendix E
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will then reboot into normal operation.
Save Complete
Printer Will Now
Reboot...
If there is not enough space on the SD to save the entire flash image, you will be prompted with the following message.
NOT ENOUGH
SPACE ON SD
Delete SD File
This is a fatal error and requires user intervention. Cycle power on the printer, when prompted to save the QCMC select <CANCEL> to skip. The printer will boot online and allow access to the EMC file menus located under the Printer
Control menu. Delete unnecessary SD files then try the QCMC Save operation again.
364
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
Always power off the printer before removing or inserting the QCMC. Place the QCMC into the second printer’s memory slot. Upon power up, the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC and a check of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image from this
QCMC on the printer. If no, the following message will display:
QCMC DETECTED
Copy to Printer?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>
NOTE: This message will appear every time at power-up until the QCMC settings are copied to the printer.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation and not copy any information to the printer. On subsequent power-ups the
Copy message above will display again if the QCMC remains installed in the printer.
NOTE: If the QCMC remains installed in the printer, the MAC address onboard will be used in place of the resident MAC address to the printer’s LAN/WAN interface card.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online immediately, but will copy the contents of the QCMC to the printer’s flash, creating a clone of the original printer. Before the copy process is allowed to continue, checks of the printer configuration will be made. If either of the checks fail, a message
will display on the front panel (in the hierarchy shown on page 365) and the
printer will not copy any settings.
INVALID SD
Power Off Printer
Remove Cartridge
This means that the QCMC is not compatible with the printer’s software. A software upgrade is required, or a different configured QCMC will be needed.
365
Appendix E
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
A QCMC validation check will be performed to ensure the data stored on the
SD is not corrupted. If the test fails the following fault message will display.
QCMC DATA ERROR
ON SD
Delete & Resave
QCMC Data
This means that the data on the QCMC was not saved properly, and must be deleted then resaved. Follow the instructions for deleting files, then repeat the copying process.
If all the checks pass, then the printer will copy the files from the QCMC to the target printer.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Copying QCMC To
Printer...
XX%
Upon successful completion, the printer will display the following message on the front panel and reboot into normal operation.
Copy Complete
366
Updating the QCMC Image
This option should only be used when a QCMC has already been stored and when that QCMC already contains the printer build and files on the printer. If only some configuration settings have been altered, the menu “Update
QCMC” can be used to update the configuration settings in the image stored on the QCMC.
To utilize this option, navigate to the menu “Update QCMC” and press the
ENTER key.
Below is a list of items that will be updated on the QCMC by the “Update
QCMC” operation:
•
Custom configurations (1–8)
•
All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
•
Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
Below is a list of items that will NOT be updated on the QCMC by the “Update
QCMC” operation:
•
Printer Program File (software)
•
Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
•
Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to the printer.
While the printer is updating the QCMC configuration, the following message will display. Do not interrupt the process.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will then reboot into normal operation.
367
Appendix E
Erasing the QCMC Image
Erasing the QCMC Image
This option should only be used when a QCMC has already been stored and when the user desires to start fresh with a new image.
To utilize this option, navigate to the menu “Erase QCMC” and press the
ENTER key.
When this option is activated, all QCMC files and configurations will be deleted from the SD card.
While the printer is erasing the QCMC configuration, the following message will display. Do not interrupt the process.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Erasing Files
On QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will then reboot into normal operation.
368
F
PTX_SETUP Commands
Overview
The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations.
This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands available to line matrix printers.
The PTX_SETUP Commands
The PTX_SETUP commands were originally designed for the disk-based laser and thermal printers with IGPs. However, line matrix printers can still benefit from general functionalities provided by the PTX_SETUP commands.
Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1.
PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an
IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP commands will be processed by the base emulation.
2.
Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and
FILE_IO are synonymous.
3.
The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP commands are in upper case characters only.
4.
The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces and tabs. This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier readability.
5.
The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new line character.
6.
Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The offending command will be the first line of printed text.
7.
Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.
369
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
General Commands
The original PTX_SETUP commands were implemented on the disk-based legacy laser printers; however, many commands are general and are also supported on line matrix printers. This section describes the existing commands which work across all platforms, and provides a general description of how commands are formed.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed them within jobs.
PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:
(SFCC)PTX_SETUP
Command–Sub Command;Value
PTX_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the exclamation mark (!, hex 21), and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the following command:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN
PTX_END
Table 1 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations
and gives a brief description of the command. This section documents the existence of PTX_SETUP commands which work across all platforms. The following sections document commands which are specific to line matrix.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to correct the error.
370
General Commands
Command
CONFIG
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific)
Sub-Command
LOAD
SAVE
SETMENU
POWERUP
DELETE
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
Parameter Description
Cfg
Cfg
Value;Menu_tag
Menu_tag is the name of the menu as defined in the menu file. Value is the value to which the menu is to be set.
Cfg
Cfg must be 1-8. This command will save the current configuration as configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the range of 1-8, the command is ignored.
Sets the power-up configuration to
Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.
Cfg can be any value from 0-8, where 0 is the factory default.
Cfg
Cfg can be 0-8. The PTX_SETUP will load configuration Cfg. If configuration Cfg was not previously saved, the operator panel will display an error message and the current configuration will be kept.
Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be a number 1-8, or one of four predefined configurations. The four non-numeric configurations are requested using the first character for the CURRENT, FACTORY,
POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).
Cfg
Port;Cfg
Cfg
Deletes Configuration number Cfg.
Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.
This command uploads the configuration stored in location Cfg to the port specified by Port. Port must either be 1284 or SERIAL. Cfg may be 1-8 or ALL.
This command saves the configuration data that follows as configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8 or END.
371
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
CONFIG
Sub-Command
OVERLAY
RESET
GET_NAMES
SET_NAME
CLEAR_NAMES
MPI_SELECT
PNE_PORT
Cfg
Parameter
“Port”
Cfg
MPI
Port
Description
This command overlays the configuration data that follows on existing configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8 (or END). If Cfg does not exist then command is treated the same as DOWNLOAD.
Reboots the printer.
This command uploads the names of the configurations to the port specified by Port. Port must either be “1284” or “SERIAL”.
This command downloads a name for the configuration specified by
Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8.
This command resets all of the configuration names to their default values.
This command selects the active
Management Protocol Interface
(MPI). Currently there are two selections “UCP” and “PXML”.
This command selects the port that the PNE will use to communicate to the printer.
The valid ports are:
•
DISABLE
•
ETHERNET
•
USB
NOTE: If ETHERNET is selected but not enabled, the selection will revert to
DISABLE.
372
General Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
CONFIG
Sub-Command
PANEL
Parameter
LOCK
Description
This command locks the operator out of the printer’s configuration menu.
LP MODE
PNE_PORT_NUM
PXML_PORT_NUM n/a
UNLOCK
Port Number
Port Number
Protocol
This command unlocks the printer’s configuration menu and allows the operator access to the menus. By default, the menu is unlocked.
This command sets the Port
Number the PNE uses to communicate to the printer if the
PNE Port was set to Ethernet. This command causes the printer to automatically reboot.
This command sets the Port
Number the PXML and UCP will use to communicate to the printer if the
PXML Port is set to Ethernet. This command causes the printer to automatically reboot.
Protocol must be 0-4. This command resets the software protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050
373
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
Sub-Command
CAPTURE
DRIVE
PROPS
DEL
Parameter
Filename
Letter
File;Prop
Filename
Description
Captures all incoming data into a file named Filename. Receipt of a
FILE_IO–CAPTURE command without the Filename parameter will force the file data to be written to flash, and will end the file capture.
This command is parsed for backwards compatibility. However, since the flash file system is a single device, the drive letter will be ignored.
The PROPS command will set the file properties of a given file. The file properties are a four letter, case sensitive file descriptor. The properties field can be used to ensure that a file is used for its intended purpose. Once properties have been associated with a file, they cannot be changed.
The DEL command will mark a file as deleted. The space the file occupied will be freed the next time the printer is powered up.
374
General Commands
Command
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
PTX_END
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Sub-Command
RUNFILE
UPLOAD
MAXSIZE
MINSIZE
OPTIMIZE
(none)
File;Prop
File;Port
Kb
Kb
Parameter
(none)
(none)
Description
The RUNFILE command will open the file named File for printing. After the PTX_END command is processed, the contents of File will get printed before any more data is read from the host. If the Prop field is present, RUNFILE will verify that
Prop matches the saved file properties. Any mismatch will cause the command to be ignored.
Reads the file named File out of the flash file system and sends it to a host computer via the Port I/O port.
Port is either 1284 (for reverse nibble or byte mode transfer using the parallel port), or SERIAL.
NOTE: if the Ethernet option is installed, 1284 is used to upload across the network.
For backwards compatibility.
For backwards compatibility.
Causes the printer to optimize the
Flash File System. The printer automatically reboots during this process.
Exits the PTX_SETUP.
375
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Summary of the CONFIG Command
The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure
50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and
UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be
DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.
The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is correctly read from FLASH.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be unavailable.
The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTX_SETUP commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All
PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the
Protect Configurations feature.
Operation of the FILE_IO Command
When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;filename command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite
Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.
Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until the entire file is loaded. The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command
“FILE_IO–CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash.
376
Line Matrix Commands
Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient
Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System. This can be accomplished by selecting the Optimize & Reboot function in the Flash File
System menu under the ADVANCED USER menu, “Main File System.”
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.
Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.
Line Matrix Commands
Table 2 lists PTX_SETUP commands which apply to line matrix printers only.
Command
ENGINE
Table 2. Line Matrix PTX_SETUP Commands
Parameter Sub-Command
EJECT
Description
Performs a page eject.
377
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
378
G
Customer Support
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•
Model number
•
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
•
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
•
Configuration printout:
Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press the ENTER (
↵ ) key.
•
Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
•
Description of the problem (be specific)
•
Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing these samples may be required)
Americas (714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114
China (86) 800-999-6836 http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas (800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116 or (65) 6548 4132
China
India
(86) 400-886-5598
(800) 102-7869 http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx
379
Appendix G
Corporate Offices
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
380
H
Communication Notices
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the
U.S.A.
Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your Printronix representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used.
Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-
Printronix product, program, or service.
Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in writing, to:
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Printronix may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
381
Appendix H
Notices
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. Printronix has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on Printronix’s Internet site at http://www.printronix.com.
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Statements on page 383.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
•
Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or partial copy.
•
Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product (which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization.
Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation.
382
Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
European Union Conformity
This product is in compliance with the EU directives for safety, EMC, ROHS,
REACH, and WEEE. Please refer to the
Service and Support section at our web site (www.printronix.com) for the most up to Declarations of Conformity.
Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Printronix option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
383
Appendix H
Communication Statements
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Statement of CISPR 22 Compliance
Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Japanese VCCI Class A
German Conformity Statement
Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September
1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die:
Printronix GmbH
Goethering 56
D-63067 Offenbach Germany
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.”
384
EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN
55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen
Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den
Printronix Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical actions.
海拔高度和非热带性气候声明
仅适用于海拔 2000M 以下地区安全使用
仅适用于非热带气候条件下安全使用
385
Appendix H
Communication Statements
LMPPLS, LMPPHS, LMPCLS, LMPCHS 系列
行列式打印機安全注意事項說明
為保護您的安全，使用本設備時，請遵循下列安全注意事項：
•
請依照設備上所有的警告與說明進行操作。
•
請確定電源的電壓與頻率符合設備的電氣等級標籤上指定的電壓與頻率。
•
請不要將任何物件塞入設備的開口。導電的異物可能會導致短路，引起火
災、電擊、或設備損傷。
•
不要對本設備進行機械或電氣修改。對經過修改的產品的安全與法規符合
性，不負任何責任。
•
不要阻礙或覆蓋產品的開口。永遠不要將產品放在靠近輻射來源或熱源的
地方。未能依照這些指引，將可能導致過熱情況，影響產品的可靠性。
•
產品是設計來配合有中性地線的電源系統使用。為降低電擊風險，請不要
將產品插入任何其他類型的電源系統。如果您不確定建物提供的電源類
型，請向建物管理員或合格電氣技師尋求協助。
•
不是所有的電源線都有相同的電流等級，請千萬不要將隨附於您設備的電
源線用在其他產品上。請勿在產品上使用家用延長電源線。對於那些有多
條電源線的產品，請確認您將所有的電源線拔下後，才算將系統電源完全
中斷。
•
甲類警語 :
386
Taiwan
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.
Korea
Class A
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Office Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for office use (Class A), this equipment is intended to use in other than home area. Sellers or users need to take note of this.
A 급 기기
( 업무용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는
이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을
목적으로 합니다 .
Class B
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Home Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for home use (Class B), this equipment is intended to use mainly for home use and may be used in all areas.
B 급 기기
( 가정용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 가정용 (B 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는
것을 목적으로 하며 , 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 .
CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
387
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer.
eCos License
This file is part of eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Red Hat, Inc.
eCos is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 or (at your option) any later version.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with eCos; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
eCos is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
As a special exception, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or inline functions from this file, or you compile this file and link it with other works to produce a work based on this file, this file does not by itself cause the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License.
However the source code for this file must still be made available in accordance with section (3) of the GNU General Public License.
This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why a work based on this file might be covered by the GNU General Public License.
Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat, Inc. at http://sources.redhat.com/ecos/ecos-license/
388
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputation.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
389
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution, and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION, AND
MODIFICATION
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a.
You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b.
You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c.
If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
390
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3.
You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a.
Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b.
Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c.
Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
391
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6.
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the
Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
392
8.
If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE
IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING,
393
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
REPAIR OR CORRECTION
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Artifex Portions Software Copyright Notices
Portions Copyright
©
2001/2009 Artifex Software Inc.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Portions Copyright
©
1998 Soft Horizons.
All Rights Reserved.
BSD License
Portions of this software may have been derived from OpenBSD, FreeBSD or other sources, and are covered by the appropriate copyright disclaimers included herein.
Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright (C) 2002 Red Hat, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4.
Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
394
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
395
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
396
Index
A
Accented Char, PRINTER CONTROL, 224
Acknowledge, Centronics Parallel Interface
Active Char Set
Adapter, Microsoft Loopback, 271
Add
header two-key download, 284 manual two key-download, 284
OCR Font Density, 241
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, 236
Print Energy, 242
RBN End Action, 241
Alarm, ADVANCED USER Menu, 239
Alt. Char Set, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
397
ASCII data port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
ASCII Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 333
Auto Elevator, ADVANCED USER Menu, 238
Auto Locking, ADVANCED USER Menu, 238
Auto Save CONFIG. CONTROL menu
Auto Trickle
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Autowrap, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176
B
BAD NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 296
Bar Code Quality, PRINTER CONTROL, 222
Barcode Darkmode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Barcode Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Barcode Speed, IPDS Emulation, 199
Baud Rate, Serial submenu, 102
BC Check Digit, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
BCD OPTIMIZATION menu
Buffer Size in K
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
Busy On Strobe, Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Busy, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Bxx ERROR
Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 255
398
B30 STATUS INITIALIZING, 298, 324
B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 298, 324
C
Cancel Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 239
CARTRIDGE AT END POINT message, 299
CARTRIDGE INCOMPATIBLE message, 300
CARTRIDGE MISSING message, 300
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED message, 300
Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), 48
CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH message, 300
CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH message, 300
CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH message, 300
CATASTROPHIC ERROR message, 300, 325
Centronics Parallel Interface, 253
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Change Case, 3270 Params menu, 115
Changing parameter settings, 54
Changing parameters, example, 58
Characteristics, environmental, 335
Cleaning
Clear to Send (CTS), RS-232, 252
Code Page Subset, IPDS Emulation, 200
Command
Commands
Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel
Compatibility Op
399
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116
Compatibility Op, 3270 Params menu, 116
Compliance, 336
Component locations, printer, 26
Compressed Print, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
Config Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206
Configuration
Configurations
Configure Printer, Run Demo File, 286
CONFIG. CONTROL menu
Contact information, 17
Control panel keys
Copying QCMC snapshot image, Quick Change
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117
Customer Support Center, 17, 371
D
Darker print, Integrated Print Management
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), RS-232, 252
Data Lines 1 through 8
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Data Polarity
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Data Protocol, Serial submenu, 101
Data Set Ready (DSR), RS-232, 252
400
Data Strobe
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Data Term Ready, Serial submenu, 103
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), RS-232, 252
Default Code Page, IPDS Emulation, 200
Default Font, IPDS Emulation, 200
Define CR Code, 130, 133, 135, 147, 176
Define LF Code, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176
Demo Facility, 286 configure printer to run demo file, 286
pause demo file, 287 start demo file, 287 stop demo file, 287
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message, 301, 325
Diagnostics
Display Functions, PCL-II Emulation, 205
Display Language, PRINTER CONTROL, 223
Disp. Intensity, ADVANCED USER Menu, 242
DO NOT POWER OFF message, 301, 325
Download
files to Main File System, 278
manual three-key sequence, 269
Download Mode, Sending Firmware, 270
Downloaded Fonts, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
Downloaded TrueType Fonts
D50 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 301
D50 STATUS%XX Programming, 325
401
E
Early Print Cmpl
Early Print Comp (Complete), IPDS Emulation, 199
Electrical Characteristics
Elong/Alt. Font, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
EMULATION menu
Postscript/PDF, 217, 218, 219, 220
Emulation Mode, IPDS Emulation, 201
E-Net Test Unavailable message, 303, 327
Environmental characteristics, 335
Epson FX Character Set menu, 165
ERROR LOCKED SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
ERROR NOR FLASHED WAS NOT CLEARED
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message, 303, 327
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES* message, 303
ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message, 303, 327
ERROR WRONG OEM message, 303,327
ESC c Sequence, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
ESC d command, Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
ETHERNET ADDRESS Menu
ETHERNET DETECTED message, 304, 328
ETHERNET INITIALIZING message, 304, 328
ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu
ETHERNET PARAMETERSMmenu
Ethernet speed, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
Ethernet (LPR), Sending Firmware, 270
ETX/ACK, ANSI Emulation menu, 173
EXCEPTION ERROR message, 304, 328
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR message, 304
402
E00 EXE @ ADDR0 message, 302, 326
E01A TYPE 0x40 message, 302, 326
E01B TYPE 0x60 message, 302, 326
E02 MACHINE CHK message, 302, 326
E03A DSI HASH L message, 302, 326
E03B DSI HASH S message, 302, 326
E03C DSI BAT PL message, 302, 326
E03D DSI BAT PS message, 302, 326
E03E DSI CXIWX message, 302, 326
E03F DSI CXOWX message, 302, 326
E03G DSI ECXIWX message, 302, 326
E03H DSI ECXOWX message, 302, 326
E04A ISI NO TRA message, 302, 326
E04B ISI DIRECT message, 302, 326
E04C ISI PROTEC message, 302, 326
E06 NOT ALIGNED message, 302, 326
E07 ILLEGAL INS message, 302, 326
E08 FLOATINGPNT message, 302, 326
E12 SYSTEM CALL message, 302, 326
E13 TRACE INT message, 302, 326
E16 ITRANS MISS message, 302, 326
E17 DLOAD MISS message, 302, 326
E18 DSTORE MISS message, 302, 326
E19 BREAKPOINT message, 302, 326
E20 SYS MANAGE message, 302, 326
E30 DEBUGGER message, 302, 326
E31A EVENT O BP message, 302, 326
E31B EVENT 1 BP message, 302, 326
E31C EVENT 2 BP message, 302, 326
E31D EVENT 3 BP message, 302, 326
E31E EVENT 4 BP message, 302, 326
E31F EVENT 5 BP message, 302, 326
E31G EVENT 6 BP message, 302, 326
E31H EVENT 7 BP message, 302, 326
E32A CND 0 BP message, 302, 326
E32B CND 1 BP message, 302, 326
E32C CND 2 BP message, 302, 326
E32D CND 3 BP message, 302, 326
E32E CND 4 BP message, 302, 326
E32F CND 5 BP message, 302, 326
E32G CND 6 BP message, 302, 326
E32H CND 7 BP message, 302, 326
E33 WRITE BP message, 302, 326
E34 TRACE CMPLT message, 302, 326
E99 UNKNOWN INT message, 302, 326
F
Face CPI Delay, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Fault messages
Bxx ERROR
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*, 297, 324
B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*, 297, 324
B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET, 297, 324
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE*, 297, 324
B30 STATUS INITIALZING, 298, 324
B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 298, 324
CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH, 300
CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH, 300
CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH, 300
403
404
D50 STATUS UPGRADING PANEL, 295, 319
D51 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 295
D51 STATUS%XX Programming, 319
E-Net Test Unavailable, 297, 321
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn, 297,
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 297, 321
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 298, 322
FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED, 299, 322
FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2, 299, 322
HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD*, 300
HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED*, 300
INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00, 301, 323
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 302, 324
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 302, 324
PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR, 304
PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS, 304
PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR, 305
SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files, 306
SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big, 306
SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 307
SDSC CARD NOT SUPPORTED, 307, 325
SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED, 307, 325
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 308
SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER, 308
405
406
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 311
448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 314
450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big, 314
452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files, 314
614 HAMMER BANK* NOT INSTALLED, 315
619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT*, 315
622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT*, 315
703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC *, 316
704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC*, 316
705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS *, 316
709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW*, 316
720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION*, 317
Fault, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Feature File, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
FF Valid at TOF, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
File Properties Not Shown in Menus, 273
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus, 272
FLASH CHECK RETURN message, 299, 322
FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED message, 299, 322
FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2 message, 299, 322
Font Size, IPDS Emulation, 198
Format Control
Framing Errors, Serial submenu, 105
Frequent Problems, Solutions, 289
G
Gateway address
General PTX_SETUP commands, 362
GENERATING XX% NAND FLASH TABLE
Graphic Chek Cod, 5250 Params menu, 122
Graphic Chek Err, 5250 Params menu, 122
Graphics Density, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
Graphics Print, IPDS Emulation, 198
Graphics Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Graphics Scaling, IPDS Emulation, 200
H
HAMMER COIL BAD, ### Message, 300
HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD* message, 300
HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED* message, 300
HD Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327
Hex Dump Mode, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
407
Hexdump Mode, IPDS Emulation, 201
Horiz Forms, LG Emulation, 209
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional), 96
Host Override
HS Print (High Speed Print), P-Series XQ
H-Series Firmware, Main Menu, 80
H-Series Hangul
H-Series Hanzi Big5
H-Series Hanzi GB
H-Series Kanji
H-Series Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327
H00: PCI SLOT ? message, 299, 322
H01: PCI J12 message, 299, 322
I
Idle Response, Serial submenu, 104
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
configuring with the control panel, 174
Define CR (Carriage Return) Code, 176
Define LF (Line Feed) Code, 176
408
configuring with the control panel, 186
ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 300
ILL NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 290
ILL NVM VALUE 5 message, 301, 323
ILL NVM VALUE 6 message, 301, 323
ILL NVM VALUE 7 message, 301, 323
ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 301
Indian Option (Indian Language), 88
INITIALIZING... message, 301, 323
Installing Quick Change Memory Cartridge
Install, Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265
INTAKE FAN CHECK message, 301, 323
Integrated Print Management System, 48
Interfaces
Intervention Req, 3270 Params menu, 115
IP address
IP Assignment
IPDS Data Port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
Barcode Quality, 199
Early Print Comp (Complete), 199
Emulation Mode, 201
Graphics Quality, 199
Graphics Scaling, 200
Hexdump Mode, 201
I2/5 Checksum, 200
Print IPDS Fonts, 201
Undef Char Subst, 201
I2/5 Checksum, IPDS Emulation, 200
I-2/5 Guard Bars, LG Emulation, 210
J
Job Control, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
Job Sel/Typeface, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
409
K
Keep alive timer, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
L
Latch Data On
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
LG Emulation
Lighter print, Integrated Print Management
Line Terminator, PCL-II Emulation, 205
LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII Indian
LPI Adjust, PCL-II Emulation, 205
LQ-1600K
410
M
MAC address
Main File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 232
Main File System, Download Files, 272
Main Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, 78
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, 81
Manual
related documents, 16 special information, 16 warnings, 16
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence, 263
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
Max Line Width, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Max. Print Width
Menu
Menus
file properties not shown, 273
Mgmt Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Mgmt Protocol, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265
Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
N
NEW SPX DETECTED message, 302, 324
Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED message, 302,
Not Shown in Menus, Filename Extensions, 272
O
OCR Font Density, ADVANCED USER Menu, 241 ffline Process
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Offline Process, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
Offline Process, Serial submenu, 105
One Char Enquiry, Serial submenu, 104
Online
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
411
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware,
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, Main
Operation of FILE_IO command, 368
Operational procedures
P
Page Length Rep, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Page L./Inches, PCL-II Emulation, 205
Page L./Lines, PCL-II Emulation, 205
PANEL BAD CHECKSUM message, 302, 324
Panel Display, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 302
PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 302
Paper
Paper Empty (PE)
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Paper Instruction (PI)
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Paper Out Dots, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Parallel Interface
Parallel, Sending Firmware, 270
Parameter settings
Parameters, changing, example, 58
412
Perforation Skip, PCL-II Emulation, 204
PI Ignored
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN PROGRESS
Plot Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, ADVANCED
PNE Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
PNE Port Timeout, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
PNE Port, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Poll Character, Serial submenu, 104
Poll Response, Serial submenu, 104
Port Type, Auto Switching submenu, 94
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116
Postscript/PDF submenu
Pos. on BC/OvrSz, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Power Consumption
Power Saver Time, ADVANCED USER, 234
Power Stacker, ADVANCED USER Menu, 231
POWER SUPPLY HOT * message, 303
Power-Up State, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
Primary Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Prime Signal
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
Prime, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
Print Energy, ADVANCED USER Menu, 237
Print Hist. Log, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Print IPDS Fonts, IPDS Emulation, 201
Print Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210
Print Statistics, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Printer
413
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form), 217
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), 217
PRINTER MGMT Menu
Printer Mgmt, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
Printer Tests, DIAGNOSTICS, 239
PrintNet Enterprise, consumable monitoring, 14
Printronix_SETUP Option, overview, 361
Private Mode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
PROCESSOR HALTED EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
Proprinter XL Character Set menu, 162
PROTECTED INSTR * message, 304
Prt Partial Line
P-Series Character Set menu, 150
HS Print (High Speed Print), 154
414
PS/PDF ERROR CHECK ERROR message, 304
PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR message, 304
PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS message, 304
PS/PDF ERROR I/O ERROR message, 304
PS/PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED message, 305
PS/PDF ERROR STACK ERROR message, 305
PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR message, 305
PTX Linefeed, PCL-II Emulation, 205
PTX Transparent
PTX _SETUP Option, ADVANCED USER
PUM Default, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Pwr Save Control, ADVANCED USER, 234
P8000 ANSI Firmware, Main Menu, 77
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, Main Menu, 81
P8000 LG Firmware, Main Menu, 76
P8000 PCL-II Firmware, Main Menu, 75
P8000 STD Firmware, Main Menu, 73
P8000 TN Firmware, Main Menu, 74
Q
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 355
copying QCMC snapshot image, 359
saving printer’s configuration, 357
QUICK SETUP menu
Indian Option (Indian Language), 88
R
RBN End Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
RBN Low Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
RBN Low Warn @, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
Rcv. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
Receive Data (RD), RS-232, 246
Received CR, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
Received DEL, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
REMOVE USED SPX message, 305, 324
Report Status, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Request to Send
415
Requirements
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, PCL-II Emulation, 206
Resp. Polarity
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
RESTORING BOOT CODE message, 305, 324
Ret. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications
Ribbon Cartridge, changing, 50
Ribbon End Point, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
RS-232
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 246
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 246
S
Saving Printer’s Configuration, Quick Change
SCS COMMAND ERROR message, 325
416
SD CARD ERROR message, 306, 325
SD Card, download files to, 276
SD File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files message, 306
SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big message, 306
SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED message, 307
Second Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
SECURITY VIOLATION message, 307, 325
Select Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
Sending Firmware in Download Mode, 264 ethernet (LPR), 264
Serial Matrix Character Set menu, 158
Set Lock Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Set Sharing, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
Set Text Orientn
Setup, SureStak Power Paper Stacker, 338
SHUTTLE STALL message, 308, 325
Shuttle Timeout, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED* message, 308
Shuttle Type , DIAGNOSTICS, 241
Signals
Centronics Parallel Interface, 248
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 250
Slew Relative, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
Slow Paper Slew, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
Software Build, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER message, 308
Solutions, Frequent Problems, 289
Specifications
SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED
SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED
Stacker, power, 337 operation, 337
Status Port Numb, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Stop Bits 1, Serial submenu, 103
Submenu
Subnet mask
417
SureStak Power Paper Stacker
Switch Out On, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Symbol Set Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206
System Memory, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
T
TCP PORT BUSY message, 309, 326
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), PRINTER
Three-Key Download Sequence, 263
Timeout, Auto Switching submenu, 95
TOF Action
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
Translation Tbl
Transmit Data (TD), RS-232, 246
Trickle Time
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 100
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Trickle Time, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Troubleshooting
Truncate PI Slew, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
U
Undef Char Subst, IPDS Emulations, 201
Unidirectional, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Unsolicited Rpt, LG Emulation, 210
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX* message, 309
Upr. Case Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
V
VFU Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
View Function, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Voltage
VPA Check, IPDS Emulation, 200
W
WELD SNSR MISSING message, 309
Word Length, Serial submenu, 103
418
X
XXXX CHECKING PATTERN message, 309
XXXX MEMORY FAILURE message, 309
XXXX WRITING PATTERN message, 309
x/y BARCODES / Not Found message, 292
Z
Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP)
position paper out sensor, 348
ZTP SETTINGS, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED* message, 311
104 POWER SUPPLY HOT* message, 311
3270 Params menu
401 BUFFER OVERRUN message, 311
402 CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 311
409 FRAMING ERROR message, 311
439 SHTL MISMATCH message, 313
448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED message, 314
449 SD FILE WRITE message, 314
450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big message, 314
452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files message, 314
419
5250 Params menu
607 CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 314
608 DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD message, 314
609 EXHAUST FAN CHECK message, 315
613 HAM. COIL BAD Message, 315
614 HAMMER BANK NOT INSTALLED message, 315
615 HAMMER BANK CHECK Message, 315
617 LOWER DRIVER SHORT* message, 315
619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT* message, 315
620 POWER VOLT CHECK* message, 315
622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT* message, 315
624 UPPER DRIVER SHORT* message, 316
702 FIRMWARE ERROR message, 316
703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC * message, 316
704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC* message, 316
705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS * message, 316
706 PAP BAD TABLE* message, 316
708 PAPER FIFO OVERFLOW* message, 316
709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW* message, 316
710 PAP ILLGL ST* message, 316
712 PAP INVLD CMD* message, 316
713 PAP INVLD PARM* message, 316
717 PLAT INV CMD* message, 317
718 PLAT INV PARM* message, 317
719 PLAT INV STATE* message, 317
720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION* message, 317
721 RIB INVLD CMD* message, 317
723 SHUTL INV CMD* message, 317
724 SHUTL INV PARM* message, 317
725 SHUTL OVER SPEED* message, 317
727 SOFTWARE ERROR* message, 317
730 TCB CORRUPTED* message, 317
733 DP FIFO Busy* message, 317
420
*256381-001*
256381-001D
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Fast print speeds of up to 1,000 characters per second
Reliable operation with a long life span
Versatile connectivity options including USB, Ethernet, and serial
Compact design for space-constrained environments
User-friendly interface for easy operation
Advanced features such as automatic paper loading and jam detection
Robust construction for durability and longevity
Frequently asked questions
The maximum print speed of the Printronix P8010 is 1,000 characters per second.
The Printronix P8010 offers a range of connectivity options including USB, Ethernet, and serial.
Yes, the Printronix P8010 is designed with a compact form factor, making it ideal for use in space-constrained environments.
The Printronix P8010 offers a reliable operation with a long life span.
Yes, the Printronix P8010 includes advanced features such as automatic paper loading and jam detection.